Professional Documents
Culture Documents
0395 PDF
0395 PDF
Charlotte Højholt
Ernst Schraube Editors
Subjectivity
and
Knowledge
Generalization in the Psychological
Study of Everyday Life
Theory and History in the Human
and Social Sciences
Series Editor
Jaan Valsiner
Department of Communication and Psychology
Aalborg University
Aalborg, Denmark
Theory and History in the Human and Social Sciences will fill in the gap in the
existing coverage of links between new theoretical advancements in the social and
human sciences and their historical roots. Making that linkage is crucial for the
interdisciplinary synthesis across the disciplines of psychology, anthropology,
sociology, history, semiotics, and the political sciences. In contemporary human
sciences of the 21st there exists increasing differentiation between neurosciences
and all other sciences that are aimed at making sense of the complex social,
psychological, and political processes. Thus new series has the purpose of (1)
coordinating such efforts across the borders of existing human and social sciences,
(2) providing an arena for possible inter-disciplinary theoretical syntheses, (3) bring
into attention of our contemporary scientific community innovative ideas that have
been lost in the dustbin of history for no good reasons, and (4) provide an arena for
international communication between social and human scientists across the World.
This Springer imprint is published by the registered company Springer Nature Switzerland AG
The registered company address is: Gewerbestrasse 11, 6330 Cham, Switzerland
Series Editor’s Preface
v
vi Series Editor’s Preface
through. We feel into our environments and by doing that develop ourselves for
further encounters with the world. Social practices carried out by human beings are
affective practices—a simple truth that can be understood when one observes foot-
ball fans performing their support acts on a stadium, or a gambler in a casino, or a
mother trying to cope with her toddler’s temper tantrum in front of the supermarket
audience. All of the participants in these dramatic events view these as meaning-
ful—“our team must win,” “I want to win,” and “my child should obey” are the
parallel reflections of subjective kinds to support the publicly visible actions. All
these (and other) reflections are local particulars—yet the subjective affectivated
(Cornejo et al. 2018) meanings are a form of single-instance generalizations of
desires and normativity. Human beings are intentional actors who strive towards
goals beyond each and every local everyday life situation—yet the pathways towards
these goals are worked out in each here-and-now situation.
The present volume continues the path of inquiry into new directions in psychol-
ogy that was outlined in the “Yokohama Manifesto” of 2016. In that collective work
(Valsiner et al. 2016) the interdisciplinary foundations for the science of a specifi-
cally human kind of psychology which starts from the axiomatic bases of an open-
systemic look at the psychological functioning of a species where higher
psychological functions play a primary role in our relating with our environments.
Psychological phenomena are unique among those of other sciences by being orga-
nized through normative constraints (Christensen 2019) and are inherently social in
their origins (Joerchel and Benetka 2018). Psychological science is therefore neces-
sarily in need to develop new conceptualizations of its approaches as normativity is
not part of the phenomena of any other natural science. For that reason, borrowing
theoretical systems from psychology’s usual “reference points” in the natural sci-
ences—physics, chemistry, or even biology—would not lead to adequate epistemo-
logical solutions. Our contemporary fascination with the neurosciences is an
intellectual impasse that replaces finding new solutions for understanding by the
seductive beauty of multicolored brain images. Psychology as science needs to find
its own solutions—rather than import these, wholesale, from neighboring
disciplines.
Nevertheless, there are some “near neighbors” from whom we can benefit.
Closest to psychology’s needs would be developmental biology—yet even there the
development of biological systems does not include radical reorganization of the
whole biological system by an “inherent intention” of that system to innovate itself
towards some goal state of an imaginary new “final form.” Psychological science of
everyday life phenomena needs to be built on the assumptions of the active creation
of novel forms of subjective personal worlds under the influence of invented possi-
ble and desirable states of the system in the future. Innovations in technologies and
fashion designs demonstrate the open-endedness of human imagination.
This specificity of psychology—a science of how desires for the future become
turned into realities of human being in its present (and rapidly emerging past)—nec-
essarily is based on the acts of generalization. These acts, however, acquire a special
focus—that of generalizing for the future. The future of a developing human being
is unknown—our personal life histories cannot be predetermined by the past. The
Series Editor’s Preface vii
References
Christensen, B. A. (Ed.) (2019). The second cognitive revolution: A tribute to Rom
Harré. New York: Springer.
Cornejo, C., Marsico, G., & Valsiner, J. (2018). I activate you to affect me:
Affectivating as a cultural psychological phenomenon. In C. Cornejo, G. Marsico
& J. Valsiner (Eds.), I activate you to affect me: Vol. 2. Annals of Cultural
Psychology series (pp. 1–10). Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishers.
Joerchel, A. C., & Benetka, G. (Eds.) (2018). Memories of Gustav Ichheiser: Life
and work of an exiled social scientist. New York: Springer.
Valsiner, J., Marsico, G., Chaudhary, N., Sato, T., & Dazzani, V. (Eds.) (2016).
Psychology as the science of human being. Cham: Springer.
Contents
ix
x Contents
Index������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 243
Contributors
xi
xii Contributors
Ernst Schraube and Charlotte Højholt
Numerical Generalization
contexts. Within this perspective, generalization is seen as not possible from a single
case. This principle refers to the problem of induction and the notion that it is logi-
cally untenable to conclude from a single case to many or all cases (or from unknown
to known, or from particular to general propositions). Therefore, the research design
is usually based on representative samples which aim to adequately reflect the popu-
lation as a whole so that the findings of the sample can be “generalized” to the popu-
lation. To generalize, here, therefore means to generalize through representative
samples. It is a form of concluding on the basis of statistical inference from a repre-
sentative sample to a more general population, category, or class and in this way a
move toward the abstract aiming at universality. Major traditions of psychological
research build on numerical generalization of frequencies as the basis of evidence
and the central practice of developing knowledge, and apply it in various forms espe-
cially in classical experimental settings as well as surveys with questionnaires.
The exploration of frequencies can definitely help to develop relevant and soci-
etally important knowledge, especially about the distribution of a phenomenon (for
instance, about the frequency of stress in a certain population). However, as the
principal or only form of epistemic approach in psychological research, it would be
too narrow and one-sided. Usually, the results require further, more in-depth psy-
chological investigation to shed light on the phenomenon in its relevant contexts
(e.g., why and how do persons of a certain population develop stress, how is it expe-
rienced in everyday practice, what is stress about, and what kind of conditions is it
connected with?). One issue, which refers to a fundamental dilemma of generaliza-
tion in frequencies is, that the methodological strategies make it difficult to access
the richness of psychological phenomena. Depending on how numbers are used,
interpreted, and communicated, they may lead to a kind of overgeneralization. In
fact, epistemic strategies of measuring can reduce and even distort psychological
phenomena and undermine the possibility of investigating human subjectivity,
experience, and action.
Accordingly, a major concern with numerical generalization as the only form of
developing psychological knowledge refers to the lack of systematically including
human subjectivity in the epistemic account. How can we approach and construc-
tively work with the problems, concerns, and dilemmas of people in the contexts in
which they actually unfold if we do not include the subjective experience, percep-
tion, emotion, thought, and reasons for action of persons? How can we contribute
with substantial knowledge to understanding and bringing movement into the
problems of human life if we do not systematically include human agency and the
creation of and dealing with the problems we are confronted with in our contempo-
rary world? When the world is dangling on a string and natural scientists are warn-
ing that the whole is at risk (Ripple et al. 2017: 1028, in the declaration Warning to
Humanity: A Second Notice, signed by over 15,000 scientists), the question of
rethinking scientific generalization and the relationship between the particular and
the general is at stake. To be able to understand and work with these issues and
participate in forming a possible future society, we have to systematically include
the question of human subjectivity, experience, and agency.
Since the 1960s, the issue of a too narrow, particular, and fixed conception of
generalization and ways of developing scientific knowledge has been widely dis-
1 Introduction: Subjectivity and Knowledge… 5
Post-Generalizing Approaches
plicity of psychological phenomena and human life are seen in conflict with nomo-
thetic accounts aiming to identify general principles and laws. Scientific practices of
classification and categorization cannot acknowledge and facilitate the investigation
of the heterogeneity and contextuality of human experience. However, psychologi-
cal inquiry, which appreciates the unique and gives proper weight to the diversity of
human life in local conditions (including those in which numerical generalizations
are applied)—so the main argument—has to turn any generalization into a tentative
working hypothesis, not a conclusion. As Yvonna Lincoln and Egon Guba explain,
“Local conditions … make it impossible to generalize. If there is a ‘true’ generaliza-
tion, it is that there can be no generalization” (1985: 124).
The shift toward situated epistemologies and the inclusion of the subjectivity,
diversity, and multiplicity of human life consequently involves a move toward
understanding scientific inquiry as action. To a certain extent, the science-as-action
perspective can also lead to a post-generalizing perspective. Within this view, the
success of scientific research can be seen as based not on the universality and truth-
claims of knowledge, but on its social relevance and how it actually can do some-
thing, contributing to improve the world and changing it for the better, including
people’s everyday life. “The researcher,” Kenneth Gergen notes, is “an active agent
in fashioning the future” (2015: 305). “The aim of research,” he explains, is not “to
illuminate what is, but to create what is to become” (2015: 294), and he argues for
“research as a future forming practice – a practice in which social change is indeed
the primary goal” (2015: 292). The perfectly justified emphasis on science-as-action
can turn the question of generalization into a more marginal issue, pivotal is only
how scientific research and the production of knowledge matters as a part of form-
ing a viable future society.
However, it could be stated that any activity to form a viable future society
involves the question of the relationship between the particular and the general and
specific practices of generalization. In fact, the specific practices of generalization
are, in our perspective, a central question in the making of the world. In continuation
of such thinking, we cannot just reject generalization, but have to expand and re-
invent it. That is our vision with the concept of situated generalization.
Situated Generalization
general knowledge not at the cost of the subjective and by disarticulating the subjec-
tive dimension of human life, but rather through the generalization of the subjective.
It is correct that we cannot conclude from a single case to many or all cases.
However, because psychological phenomena are subjective givens, psychological
generalization is only possible from and through single cases, and we have to
expand the conception of generalization as quantitative conclusions toward a quali-
tative stance of elucidating the subjective in its worldly connections. As Valsiner
explains:
Not only is generalization from the single case possible – but it is the only possible base for
generalization. And even more – generalization necessarily happens on the basis of a single
instance – each and every new experience – within the life space of the single case….
While being led by the uniqueness of each moment in life, we operate through general
principles that transcend the uniqueness of any of these moments. Generalization is pos-
sible from any single instance of our encounters with the environment. Generality is in
singularity. (2015: 233)
Psychological phenomena are simply subjective givens. On the one hand, they are
always socially mediated processes (through social, discursive, cultural and techno-
logical practice); on the other hand, they are always someone’s processes. They
exist from the point of view of a unique human being who experiences them, and in
this sense in a subjective, first-person mode (Schraube 2013; Teo 2017). The emo-
tion of love, for example, is ontologically subjective in the sense that it only exists
because it is experienced by individual subjects. Without the concrete experience of
love by an individual, there is no love. Love is an emotion, socially mediated in a
specific historical practice, but still we explore it through different individual sub-
jects’ different experiences with it—connected to their specific participation in
social practice. That is why the analysis of connections is so fundamental to gener-
alization (Højholt and Kousholt 2019). Accordingly, because the typical subject
1 Introduction: Subjectivity and Knowledge… 9
Since man and the human mind are in the midst of a world, mental phenomena are con-
nected with the most varied spheres, even with spheres outside mind; the body, fields of
external stimulation (light, sound, etc.), climate and weather, other people and human soci-
ety, civilization, historical circumstances, values. (Stern 1938: 15)
With his notion of persons as active subjects in the world, his concept of synthetic
investigation as well as his concern with moving psychological research out of the
laboratory into everyday life, in which psychological processes actually unfold, he
contributes with important steps toward a situated approach to developing psycho-
logical knowledge. Furthermore, with the concept of psychography (Stern 1911:
327), he suggests not sample-based but individual-based research practices which
actually take the uniqueness and diversity of human life seriously, and which can be
seen, as Valsiner underlines, as “the starting point to understand how generalization
occurs from single episodes of the lives of single persons” (2019: 14, Chap. 5 in this
volume).
Kurt Lewin with his Topological Psychology and the development of Action
Research continues in a subject-psychological direction. His concept of generaliza-
tion refers to human action and connects it systematically with the fabric of the
everyday world aiming to increase human agency. Building on a critique of an
Aristotelian mode of thought in which lawfulness remains limited to the recurrence
of the same event—an idea which underlies the practice of generalization in fre-
quencies—he argues in a Galilean mode of thought for rethinking the lawfulness
and intelligibility of psychological events. “Lawfulness,” he noted, is “inherent in
the nature of the psychic, and hence in all psychic processes, even those occurring
only once” (1931: 152). Every activity and single case, he recognized in his attempt
to rethink lawfulness, can be considered as lawful in the sense of meaningful,
because it resonates with the general structure of the social space in which it occurs
(Tateo 2013). Lewin worked with the question of the relationship between the par-
ticular and the general, the individual and lawful by taking the single case as a
starting point and exploring the dynamics of human life in the concrete situations
and social life-spaces in which psychological processes unfold and by examining
the concrete possibilities and limits of human experience and action within these
spaces. As Martin Dege explains, “Lewin lays the grounds to rethink generalization
as a tool in the hands of the research subjects to understand and shape their indi-
vidual life-space agentively” (2019, Chap. 3 in this volume).
One of the founders of Cultural Historical Activity Theory, Lew Vygotzky,
expands the formation of situated generalization. The activity of generalization, we
can learn here, is based on language, general concepts, and theory. Understanding
the phenomena under investigation is not independent of the words we use, and all
words and concepts already embody a process of generalization. Language is the
medium of the human capacity to think, understand and act, and essential in any
process of developing scientific knowledge. As Vygotzky explains:
Everything described as a fact is already a theory … When we meet what is called a cow
and say: “This is a cow,” we add the act of thinking to the act of perception, bringing the
given perception under a general concept … I do not see that this is a cow, for this cannot
be seen. I see something big, black, moving, lowing, etc., and understand that this is a cow.
1 Introduction: Subjectivity and Knowledge… 11
And this act is an act of classification, of assigning a singular phenomenon to the class of
similar phenomena, of systematizing the experience etc. Thus, language itself contains the
basis and possibilities for the scientific knowledge of a fact. The word is the germ of science
and in this sense we can say that in the beginning of science was the word. (1927/1997:
250f).
The produced material tools, objects, and technologies refer to human life. They
embody human experience and action, and in their making, the relationship between
the particular and the general and the processes of generalization are at stake. These
generalization processes are never complete thought-out; they are in a certain extent
always narrow, one-sided, ambivalent, and partial and therefore require continuous
critical deliberation and re-formation of materialized generalizations (Chimirri and
Schraube 2019).
Within the tradition of Cultural Psychology, Jaan Valsiner and colleagues con-
tribute to the vision of generalization as an ever-new process of signification and
meaning-making. The conception emphasizes the central role of generalization in
any scientific endeavor and fundamentally challenges any form of scientific gener-
alization which does not acknowledge that any event in the world exists in particu-
lars. Accordingly, psychological generalization is addressed and elaborated through
the uniqueness and concrete situation of human living and an exploration of the
various ways we create meaning in an ever-changing world of becoming. An essen-
tial dimension of such “intersubjective generalization” (Tateo 2016: 59) is seen in
the processes of reflexivity, distancing, and breaking away from the uniqueness,
subjectivity, and concrete reality of human life through abstraction, signs, models,
and analyses of the conditions under which the concrete reality of human life occurs.
As Zach Beckstead, Kenneth Cabell and Jaan Valsiner underline:
12 E. Schraube and C. Højholt
If phenomena are qualitatively organized by the whole system they are embedded within
(and interrelated with) then generalization should not be based on premises of separate
variables, but rather generalization should be based on the premises of generalizing under
what systemic conditions something occurs. (2009: 72)
The chapters in this collection are structured according to three sections. The first
section, Generalization and the Practice of Everyday Living, features chapters that
provide a vision for situated generalization that build on subjectivity and context in
continuous movement, and an integrated understanding of human life in a social,
cultural, and material world. In this context, Erik Axel and Charlotte Højholt (Chap.
2) identify generalization as a subjective process in praxis in which the way praxis
is coordinated, the things persons deal with in it, and the generalizations unfold
together. Generalizations are understood as subjective and social at the same time.
They are about common causes in praxis, and both are concrete as well as contradic-
tory. Moreover, participants have different perspectives on the common causes,
which stem from the way they participate in them. Generalizations, they argue,
relate to concrete conditions in praxis, and as a consequence, our generalizations
appear varied in particular ways according to the actual conditions. This theoretical
exposition is elucidated using examples from empirical research on school life.
In Chap. 3, Martin Dege presents Kurt Lewin and his concept of generalization.
Lewin is one of the most well-known psychologists. He is the founder of topologi-
cal psychology, closely related to the Gestalt psychologists, and the originator of
action research. Less well-known is the extent to which he saw a political agenda
connected to his work, and little light has been shed on his reflections in the philoso-
phy of science. Dege attempts to bring both these valuable aspects of Lewin’s body
of work into the discussion. From there, he shows how Kurt Lewin’s approach can
contribute to an alternative concept of generalization in psychology and the social
sciences.
In Chap. 4, Manolis Dafermakis presents a dialectical understanding of general-
ization based on a dialogue between Vygotsky and Davydov. Questioning formal
accounts of generalization, a dialectical perspective highlights the concrete,
dynamic, historical connection between the general and the particular. Dafermakis
shows how a dialogue between Vygotsky and Davydov, who were both adherents of
the dialectal tradition in psychology, can provide important insights for re-
conceptualizing generalization. A dialogue on dialectical understanding of general-
ization and its relation to changing societal practices is offered as a way to promote
active, transformative subjectivity.
14 E. Schraube and C. Højholt
revisions. Human beings are theorized within this tradition of thought, as partici-
pants in structurally arranged, situated social practices. Their psychological pro-
cesses unfold in, and hang together with, their participation and conduct of everyday
life in such social practices. So, their psychological processes are always affected
by being directed at and part of situated nexuses in subjects’ lives in social practices.
Therefore, to generalize means to generalize about subjects’ psychological func-
tioning in situated nexuses. But, while it is necessary to establish generalizations in
capturing concrete nexuses, it cannot be the sole purpose of research. It is also
important to capture how general and particular aspects hang together dynamically
in nexuses and how their situated composition affect the qualities and status of the
aspect or problem we study. Case studies offer unique possibilities for accomplish-
ing this which Dreier briefly illustrated by an example. Finally, he argues that grasp-
ing phenomena and problems in situated nexuses of social practice is necessary in
basic theorizing as well as in knowledge-based expertise and professional interven-
tions in subjects’ problems in the nexuses of their everyday lives.
In Chap. 11, Morten Nissen and Line Lerche Mørck engage in the development
of situated generalization through the creation of a prototypical model of dialogical
teaching practiced at a PhD course about identity formation, self-representation,
and self-exposure. A prototype is a singular practice (with its objects, premises,
subject-positions, conditions, and structures) modeled as relevant to a specific field
of practice. The idea of the prototype as situated generalization is philosophically
rooted in an epistemology of practice, as read through critical psychology as well as
social practice theory. Nissen and Mørck propose dialogical teaching by recounting
how that was performed, articulated, and reflected at the PhD course by students,
teachers, and co-researchers as different from traditional university teaching. This is
unfolded in several aspects: (a) teaching is resituated as relevant to sociocultural
change in which all participants are equally involved; (b) texts are deconstructed as
relevant to that process of change; (c) participants—including Frigga Haug and
Emily Martin who provided important inspiration—are multi-positioned as the par-
ticipants of the course meet on neutral ground and in movement; (d) together, the
participants make artifacts (including this chapter) with which they represent and
recognize themselves as individuals and as collective; (e) this implies co-creating
ethics of care, overcoming the separation and externality of ethics from practice.
In Chap. 12, Peter Busch-Jensen and Ernst Schraube focus on the methodology
of situated generalization, including the importance of analyzing social and mate-
rial structures. Based on a presentation of fundamental characteristics of psycho-
logical processes including its subjective, contextual, and transient dimensions,
they argue for a notion of psychological generalization which does not abstract
away human subjectivity and difference but understands it as different manifesta-
tions of the same relationship. Based on such an embodied, subjectivity-in-every-
day-life approach to the production of knowledge, they ask how generalization in
psychological research practice can be done, and they present a variety of basic
analytical strategies of situated generalization including Zooming In to Zoom Out
and Zooming Out to Zoom In.
1 Introduction: Subjectivity and Knowledge… 17
References
Axel, E., & Højholt, C. (2019). Subjectivity, conflictuality and generalization in social praxis. In
C. Højholt & E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity and knowledge: Generalization in the psycho-
logical study of everyday life (pp. 23–40). New York: Springer.
Bang, J. (2019). On the worldliness of the general. In C. Højholt & E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity
and knowledge: Generalization in the psychological study of everyday life (pp. 101–114).
New York: Springer.
Beckstead, Z., Cabell, K., & Valsiner, J. (2009). Generalizing through conditional analysis:
Systemic causality in the world of eternal becoming. Humana.Mente: Journal of Philosophical
Studies, 11, 65–80.
Brinkmann, S. (2012). Qualitative inquiry in everyday life. London: Sage.
Brinkmann, S. (2015). Empirical philosophy: Using your everyday life in theoretical psychology.
In J. Martin, J. Sugarman, & L. Slaney (Eds.), The Wiley handbook of theoretical and philo-
sophical psychology: Methods, approaches, and new directions for social sciences (pp. 409–
423). New York: Wiley.
Brock, A. (2016). The universal and the particular in psychology and the role of history in explain-
ing both. In S. H. Klempe & R. Smith (Eds.), Centrality of history for theory construction in
psychology (pp. 29–46). Cham: Springer.
Chimirri, N. A., & Schraube, E. (2019). Rethinking psychology of technology for future society:
Research practice from within everyday life. In K. O’Doherty, L. Osbeck, E. Schraube, &
J. Yen (Eds.), Psychological studies of science and technology. London: Palgrave Macmillan.
Dafermos, M. (2019). Developing a dialectical understanding of generalization: An unfinalized
dialogue between Vygotsky and Davydov. In C. Højholt & E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity and
knowledge: Generalization in the psychological study of everyday life (pp. 61–77). New York:
Springer.
Davydov, V. V. (1984). Substantial generalization and the dialectical-materialist theory of thinking.
In M. Hedegaard, P. Hakkarainen, & Y. Engeström (Eds.), Learning and teaching on a scientific
basis. Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Dege, M. (2019). Rethinking generalization with Kurt Lewin and action research. In C. Højholt &
E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity and knowledge: Generalization in the psychological study of
everyday life (pp. 41–60). New York: Springer.
Demuth, C. (2017). Generalization from single cases and the concept of double dialogicality.
Integrative Psychological and Behavioral Science, 52(1), 77–93. https://doi.org/10.1007/
s12124-017-9399-1.
Dreier, O. (2007). Generality and particularity of knowledge. In V. van Deventer, M. Terre Blanche,
E. Fourie, & P. Segalo (Eds.), Citizen city: Between constructing agent and constructed agent
(pp. 188–196). Concord: Captus University Publications.
Dreier, O. (2016). Conduct of everyday life: Implications for critical psychology. In E. Schraube &
C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 15–33). London: Routledge.
Flick, U. (2014). An introduction to qualitative research. London: Sage.
Gergen, K. J. (2015). From mirroring to world-making: Research as future forming. Journal for
the Theory of Social Behaviour, 45(3), 287–310.
Haraway, D. J. (1991). Situated knowledges: The science question in feminism and the privilege of
partial perspectives. In Simians, cyborgs, and women: The reinvention of nature (pp. 183–201).
New York: Routledge.
Hess, D. (1997). Science studies: An advanced introduction. New York: New York University
Press.
Hodgetts, D., Stolte, O., Drew, N., Sonn, C., Nikora, L. W., & Carr, S. (2020). Social psychology
and everyday life. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Højholt, C. & Kousholt, D. (2019). Developing knowledge through participation and collabora-
tion: Research as mutual learning processes. Annual Review of Critical Psychology.
18 E. Schraube and C. Højholt
Højholt, C., & Schraube, E. (2016). Toward a psychology of everyday living. In E. Schraube &
C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 1–14). London: Routledge.
Holzkamp, K. (1983). Grundlegung der Psychologie. Frankfurt/M.: Campus.
Holzkamp, K. (1991). Experience of self and scientific objectivity. In C. W. Tolman & W. Maiers
(Eds.), Critical psychology: Contributions to an historical science of the subject (pp. 65–80).
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Holzkamp, K. (2013a). Missing the point: Variable psychology’s blindness to the problem’s
inherent coherence? In E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint
of the subject: Selected writings of Klaus Holzkamp (A. Boreham & U. Osterkamp, Trans.)
(pp. 60–74). Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Holzkamp, K. (2013b). Psychology: Social self-understanding on the reasons for action in the con-
duct of everyday life. In E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint
of the subject: Selected writings of Klaus Holzkamp (A. Boreham & U. Osterkamp, Trans.)
(pp. 233–341). Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Holzkamp, K. (2016). Conduct of everyday life as a basic concept of critical psychology. In
E. Schraube & C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 65–98).
London: Routledge.
Jensen, U. J. (1999). Categories in activity theory: Marx’s philosophy just-in-time. In S. Chaiklin,
M. Hedegaard, & U. J. Jensen (Eds.), Activity theory and social practice (pp. 79–99). Aarhus:
Aarhus University Press.
Kaplan, A. (1964). The conduct of inquiry: Methodology for behavioral science. San Francisco:
Chandler.
Knorr Cetina, K. (1999). Epistemic cultures: How the sciences make knowledge. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press.
Kvale, S., & Brinkmann, S. (2009). InterViews: Learning the craft of qualitative research inter-
viewing. London: Sage.
Latour, B., & Woolgar, S. (1986). Laboratory life: The construction of scientific facts. Princeton:
Princeton University Press.
Lave, J. (2019). Learning and everyday life: Access, participation, and changing practice.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Lave, J., & Wenger, E. (1991). Situated learning: Legitimate peripheral participation. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Lawrence, J. A., Dodds, A. E., & Valsiner, J. (2004). The many faces of everyday life: Some chal-
lenges to the psychology of cultural practice. Culture & Psychology, 10(4), 455–476.
Leontyev, A. N. (2009). Problems of the development of the mind. Pacifica: Marxists Internet
Archive.
Lewin, K. (1931). The conflict between Aristotelian and Galileian modes of thought in con-
temporary psychology. Journal of General Psychology, 5, 141–177.
Lincoln, Y. S., & Guba, E. G. (1985). Naturalistic inquiry. Beverly Hills: Sage.
Muchow, M., & Muchow, H. H. (2015). The life space of the urban child. In G. Mey & H. Günther
(Eds.), The life space of the urban child: Perspectives on Martha Muchow’s classical study
(pp. 63–146). New Brunswick: Transaction.
O’Doherty, K., Osbeck, L., Schraube, E., & Yen, J. (Eds.). (2019). Psychological studies of science
and technology. Cham: Palgrave Macmillan.
Ripple, W. J., Wolf, C., Newsome, T. M., Galetti, M., Alamgir, M., Crist, E., Mahmoud,
M. I., & Laurance, W. F. (2017). World scientists’ warning to humanity: A second notice.
BioScience, 67(12), 1026–1028. https://doi.org/10.1093/biosci/bix125
Røn Larsen, M. (2016). “May I please tell you a little anecdote?”: Inter-professional decision-
making about inclusion in the borderland between normal and special schooling. International
Journal on School Disaffection, 12(1), 65–84. https://doi.org/10.18546/IJSD.12.1.04.
Rose, N. (1999). Governing the soul: The shaping of the private self. London: Free Association
Books.
Salvatore, S., & Valsiner, J. (2010). Between the general and the unique. Overcoming the nomo-
thetic versus idiographic opposition. Theory & Psychology, 20(6), 817–833.
1 Introduction: Subjectivity and Knowledge… 19
Erik Axel and Charlotte Højholt
“I thought you were against that sort of thinking!” was a reaction we got while we
were writing about generalization. Through such exchanges, we realized that in
everyday conversation when somebody says “now you are generalizing,” it implies
that one is simplifying the matter at hand, overlooking important aspects of it, and
sometimes even obliterating them. Actually, our friend was right, we question gen-
eralizations of that character.
On the other hand, simplifying can be necessary, since not all aspects of a situa-
tion are important for our purpose in question. We must be able to identify what is
meaningful in a certain historical social practice. To generalize also means that we
must be able to identify what is important for our purpose, and what is not.
To state, on the one hand, that generalizations can be simplifications and may be
understood as holding good for too much, as overgeneralization, and that on the
other we need simplifications and something which holds under these conditions,
offers a clue to our approach to this issue. We want to embed the analysis of gener-
alization in the “historical actualities of people’s doings and relations” (Smith 2005:
56), or as Dreier states regarding his notion of nexus: “A theory meant to capture
linked aspects in a changing social practice must combine generality with change”
(2008: 298, compare Lave 2019). Our critique of generalization as overgeneraliza-
tion points to the theoretical challenge we will address: instead of searching for
scientific methods to verify that whatever studied is universally general, is wide-
spread, counts for everybody in this category, and so on, we need to build on differ-
ences, perspectives, connections, and concrete situations relevant for our purpose.
In this chapter, we seek to demonstrate how we understand the general through
differences, variations, and changes to historical causes and common problems in
social praxis. We argue that a generalization is in a social praxis (Juul Jensen 1999).
We posit that in order to live in our everyday life, we constantly generalize with all
the strengths and weaknesses of the process. We further posit that scientific gener-
alization is a specific form of everyday generalization that is developed under spe-
cific conditions, never final. In the chapter, we will scrutinize generalization as an
everyday matter from which we can learn about the conditions for scientific gener-
alization and about how we may work with these in relation to research.
As a consequence, our approach blurs the distinction between theory and praxis.
People’s doings and relations are rife with insights, and we can find theories devel-
oped on these. They have been developed more or less systematically in social
praxis. Researchers develop scientific theories on the basis of what appears reason-
able to them, which includes their everyday praxis just like other people’s, as well
as their scientific empirical work and that of others.
Whether a generalization comes to us immediately or slowly over an extended
period of time, it is always a process, and sometimes we find ourselves generalizing
in ways we never did before. Our conceptual approach to generalization must there-
fore assist us in understanding how we make new generalizations and how we learn
in concrete, changing practices. In order to understand how we generalize, we must
focus on the historical conditions of the process. For instance, we generalize about
schooling by taking part in its changing social practice and its historical conditions,
and by investigating how the practice of the school developed before we took part.
So, our understanding of generalization must enable us to grasp such connection
practice, conditions, and history.
According to our approach to generalization situated in historical and everyday
relations, we must begin our presentation by examining how we as human beings
generalize. To do this, we will use examples from everyday school life. We shall
connect generalization to the concrete everyday aspects of human life and analyze
and discuss generalization as tied to people’s doings and relations. This requires
that we study generalization as a personal phenomenon. Drawing on our back-
ground in critical psychology, we will discuss the subjective aspects of our actions
in praxis (Schraube and Osterkamp 2013; Dreier 2008; Axel 2009; Schraube
2015). These subjective aspects shape, and are thereby shaped by, the way we act
and participate in praxis: we must turn things over in praxis in order to generalize
while we act—we must deliberate in order to act in a better way. This means that
generalization has critical elements. On the basis of situating generalization every
day, we shall suggest how an understanding of scientific generalization can be
developed. As a consequence, we shall argue that research must be critical and
oriented toward its own development and focus, its institutions, theories, methods,
and field of study. We will show how in spite of the experienced and systematic
development, scientific generalizations are beset by the same problems as every-
day generalizations, namely for example oversimplification and overgeneraliza-
tion. We shall argue that these problems can be addressed by understanding
scientific generalizations as continuous processes, as a praxis involving relevant,
historical, and critical aspects. It is thus the critical approach open to development
which ensures whether a generalization is anchored in the problems of concrete
2 Subjectivity, Conflictuality, and Generalization in Social Praxis 25
social praxis and encompasses relevant aspects for the combined and relevant
efforts of the different participants. For example, when we generalize in relation to
a problem in a school, we must critically take into account the concrete social
praxis around the school and historical conditions relevant to the problem. If the
generalization of the problem is open to different perspectives in these practices,
and to the context of the school, the relevance of the research to school life will
help us to avoid simplifications and overgeneralizations.
s ubjective aspects of our action can therefore be seen as related to how we identify
what is relevant by exploring concrete conditions aware of what is going on, what
we want to achieve, and aware of the fact that more is going on, than we are aware of.
When we generalize, we recognize what is important for our purpose and what
is not, and we mediate the past, present, and the future, here and there in meaningful
ways. In moving praxis, we assume that our generalizations will provide stability.
However, since generalization is made on the run in concrete praxis with many con-
nections, its stability is not guaranteed, so we must constantly be prepared to put it
on trial. In Dewey’s (1929/1958: 57) words, the stability of generalization is pre-
carious, perilous, and unsettled. This openness is in contrast to the character of
generalization simplifying the matter at hand, overlooking important aspects of it
that we criticized in the beginning of the chapter and will return to later.
Seen from this perspective, human beings are entangled in praxis, and generaliza-
tions are in the relations between human beings and the praxis in which they partici-
pate. Since we generalize on the basis of what is relevant for our participation, the
general is an aspect of our subjective relations in a given situation. We learn about
things acting with each other. On the other hand, our insights depend on the ways in
which each of us participates and has possibilities for it. Even though generaliza-
tions come out of social praxis, any generalization occurs from a person’s subjective
participation in praxis.
Above, we have offered a preliminary account of the relation between praxis and
generalization. Even though generalization mediates other times other places here,
it is in praxis, not brought to it, nor over it, nor taken out of it (Dreier 2019). Because
we are human beings, and because we share similar locations in praxis with similar
experiences and have arranged our conditions in common ways, we can share each
other’s experiences and understandings. As a consequence, our use of the term
“general” points to something changeable that encompasses differences and varia-
tions. For instance the word “family” alludes to something we understand in com-
mon even though particular families vary over time and across the world according
to relations and arrangements. Accordingly, because we generalize in historical con-
crete praxis where our activities are distributed, our generalizations are neither uni-
versal nor a-contextual. Rather, they are historical, social, subjective, and contextual.
Therefore, we generalize differently according to our experiences in praxis.
To grasp the differences in our generalizations that arise due to our different
experiences, we must explicate a concept of praxis. Historically, praxis is connected
with how well an activity is performed with respect to its ethical and political
aspects (Bernstein 1971). Later this understanding was included in the tradition of
historical materialism (Marx and Engels 1845/1969), which is about how human
beings produce and distribute their means of existence and thereby their social con-
ditions and themselves. We take point of departure in this understanding. Praxis is
2 Subjectivity, Conflictuality, and Generalization in Social Praxis 27
thereby a general term about human productive social activity which is steeped in
ethical and political aspects due to the distribution of the means of existence. The
term praxis incorporates the comprehensive distributions in human activity. The
term practice comprises specific activities, like teaching and studying, and the
resources they require, while praxis enables us to see how the distribution of the
specific activities is embedded in the more extensive activities of praxis.
In their historical social praxis, people arrange themselves around specific com-
mon causes such as schools, companies, families, construction projects, or political
activities of our time. Each common cause is concrete and consists of compound
practices or things. In schools, for example, children are kept off the streets, and
they find friends in relation to their school life; they are put there in order to learn
and develop, professionals teach them and make arrangements around their social
life, and the professionals cooperate with public administration, other professionals,
and parents. When we work with a common cause, we cannot work with one aspect
in isolation, we must work with the compound aspects of the common cause. All the
same, we strive to simplify matters by attempting to keep things apart. With laws
and privileges, we seek to stabilize the separations of the aspects. Nevertheless,
those involved must acknowledge that they are entangled in the compound aspects
of the common cause to make things work. Today, different kinds of professional-
ism and expertise are separated, e.g., through education, examinations, and rules of
access. In schools, expertise related to teaching is differentiated from social work or
pedagogical strategies aimed at children’s general development. As professionals in
school, teachers are there to teach children. But they cannot separate their teaching
from other activities at school. Teachers have to relate to the social life of children
and, in a way, to all aspects of children’s lives. And today in Denmark we see how
pedagogues increasingly become part of the school: they are supposed to take care
of the children’s social life, and neither can they separate their pedagogical work
with the children’s social life from other activities at school. Thus, the distribution
of contributions and responsibilities in teaching becomes divided and connected in
new ways which must be coordinated in order to make things work. To sum up, we
want to illustrate how different groups of professionals make different contributions
to the same cause and that every contribution blend with other ones.
The compound aspects of a common cause mostly do not fit together; they contain
incompatibilities, and that is why we might term them contradictions. Contradiction
is a concept with a long tradition in philosophy, and contradictions have been under-
stood in many different ways. In some ways of thinking contradictions have been
related to the development of things or meanings. This understanding of develop-
ment is termed dialectics. In some traditions, researchers have sought to establish a
fixed method for analyzing development: the first thing to do is to find the thesis,
i.e., the present thing; then its antithesis (or its negation or contradiction), i.e., the
28 E. Axel and C. Højholt
un-present thing; and lastly the synthesis of the positive and negative theses, i.e., its
idea, thus establishing how the idea of the thing appeared or developed. However,
this fixed procedure has rightfully been rejected for being schematic, a-contextual,
and practically a mere play on words. Other understandings are more situated.
The philosopher Charles Taylor writes about Hegel, who developed a historical
notion of contradictions and dialectics:
His aim is simply to follow the movement of his object of study… . If the argument follows
a dialectical movement, then this must be in the things themselves, not just in the way we
reason about them. (1975: 129)
praxis, we may develop a common cause. For example, we may open or close a
school (e.g., when the number of children in that part of town changes), we may be
concerned about schools and discuss it in the media, we may write about how it
could be changed, we may as children feel forced to participate in it and participate
in it for different reasons: e.g., to meet friends, to try to protect ourselves from risks
through it, e.g., to get a job based on one’s exam papers when grown up; or by
avoiding stress by attending schools without grades; we may as parents see our
children as safer in school than on the streets; we may, as teachers, change school
because we are critical of injustices. But, in whatever way, we all participate in com-
mon causes, and to achieve things in the common causes, we are dependent on one
another in them, and our experiences and knowing come through our participation
in them. As human beings, then, we are social beings.
Our insight into internal social relations—or, as we suggest, common causes—
comes from their differences, their cracks, or their incompatibilities, which we term
contradictions. In this way, contradictions are not seen as isolated incompatible ele-
ments. They are aspects of the common cause which force us to adapt to the incom-
patibilities, arrange, or transform them. The common cause is seen as the unit which
makes the contradictions dependent on each other (Ollman 2003: 17), and this
forces us to rework them to make things work. Ollman’s concept of internal social
relations and our concept of common cause are ways of stressing that contradictions
are bound together in a many-sided cause—for instance, a school, a house, or
a family.
By seeing the common cause not simply as compound but contradictory, we open
up the possibility of understanding the aspects of its processual nature. We can
move from understanding change as surprising, and apparently coming out of
nowhere, to understanding how people struggle with incompatibilities in their com-
mon causes. Their struggle with incompatibilities helps us to get a sense of possible
directions in which things might develop in praxis. Some directions are intended by
the participants; others are unintended but develop due to overlooked aspects of the
contradictions. We will now draw on some examples to clarify this.
While being taught, children must attend to how teachers instruct them and to
what they want from them. To relieve children from this strict focus, they are
allowed regular breaks in which they mingle with one another and start or stop com-
mon causes like play, sports, and gaming and invite some into the common activity.
Among other things, teaching requires that children focus for a given time on spe-
cific issues that do not always engage them. Between this prolonged focus on teach-
ing and the vivid flexibility of the children’s social life, we find contradictory aspects
that are still dependent on one another. Children in schools relate to the teaching
together and cooperate in their learning processes, but they may still be disturbed by
conflicts in their social relations at the expense of attention to teachings in the
30 E. Axel and C. Højholt
c lassroom. Sometimes they are able to combine teaching with their social life in a
productive way, but sometimes they get stuck in conflicts about this (Højholt 2016;
Højholt and Schwartz 2018; Højholt and Kousholt, 2019b).
We have stated that teachers cannot separate their teaching from the social life of
children, that the two are inseparable, and that we may find possible directions for
developing the common cause of school life in the tensions between teaching the
children and their social awareness in the classroom. All the same, in political dis-
cussions about the school, some strive to keep aspects apart that are tied together in
the everyday life of school practice.
We will unfold the content of this statement using an example about different
perspectives on the outcome of a school reform ushering in “longer school days.”
We use this example to illustrate how we work with generalization by anchoring the
understanding of a specific situation in its historical praxis. The example stems from
the research project, Conflicts about Children’s School Life, funded by the Danish
Council for Independent Research and organized in connected subprojects with a
joint focus on Children’s Inclusion in School Investigated as Conflictual
Cooperation, which study the same schools from different perspectives: those of the
children, as well as their parents, teachers, pedagogues, psychologists, officials, and
school executives (Højholt and Kousholt 2018, 2019b). As a part of this project, the
researchers regularly met and talked with the professionals at the involved schools.
In a situation where everybody presented their current issues, a teacher of one ninth
grade class presented the following example. The teacher explicated the process, as
well as its contradictions, conflicts, and personal dilemmas. At the meeting the
teachers and the researchers discussed how conflicts between pupils can be con-
nected to political conflicts over the school, and how pupils’ provoking engagement
in their school life can be regarded as contradicting the positive publicity of a school.
A radio channel had interviewed some eighth graders, and the pupils had com-
mented positively on the longer school days. Part of the interview was uploaded on
Facebook, and some of the ninth graders felt provoked and contradicted the inter-
view. Their teacher explained at the above-mentioned meeting that she was also
provoked by the one-sidedness of the history and remarked that she understood her
pupils’ reaction since she knew that they had a much tougher timetable. They had
school days running from 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. with theoretical teaching—and she was
together with in the afternoon hours and had the feeling that this was too much for
them. Still, she found that the way they had expressed themselves was problematic,
and she talked to them about how to deal with disagreements and with the media. As
their teacher, she wanted to show her pupils that she understood their perspectives,
and she also wanted to use the episode as an occasion for them to learn about how
to address different perspectives and exchange standpoints in the media.
Professionals from the radio channel visited the class and taught them about how to
engage with the media and behave on the Internet, and the teacher was satisfied
with this.
Still, later, the head of the school made it clear to her that the pupils should not
talk in a negative way about school problems. The teacher had the feeling that the
head of the school was happy about the positive publicity from the eighth graders,
2 Subjectivity, Conflictuality, and Generalization in Social Praxis 31
but she stated that one school could not solve the problem of the longer school days.
At the research meeting in question, this example was the focus of an exchange
about dilemmas between new demands to “brand schools” to ensure that they com-
pared favorably with other schools, and the need to organize and teach about
exchanges of perspectives in a democratic way. Another teacher talked about edu-
cating for citizenship, and the discussion turned to how the school as a democratic
welfare institution today has to compete on the basis of its success measured through
data collected about, e.g., grades, absence, and well-being—and that this threatens
the ideals of democracy, inclusion, and citizenship. During the discussion, the
teachers claimed that it was bad for democracy if teachers and students could not
talk openly about problems in their everyday lives, asking “are we not allowed to
have problems”?
We see here that a communicative contradiction between two groups of pupils
opened up a fundamental contradiction in praxis about incompatible ways of relat-
ing to school problems. This reveals various possible directions for development in
praxis. One approach is based on the evidence of good teaching from grading and
testing; it involves instruction and training, and it is controlled by the curriculum,
supported by the school administration and the law, and includes branding in an
effort to attract pupils from other schools (Busch-Jensen 2018; Røn Larsen 2019).
Another approach takes up current problems, uses them to teach the curriculum, and
thereby opens up for democratic perspectives and for the pupils’ voices. The teach-
ers take this standpoint since they take their point of departure in the need to teach
and to talk openly about problems in their own and the pupils’ everyday lives. The
teachers have to handle these two incompatible ways of teaching, and thereby
develop their teaching practice—not in order to reach a harmonious compromise
but as a way of dealing with the conflicts in question.
Like the teachers, as researchers we find that we must accept the concrete con-
flictual content of common causes, and we must recognize that children handle
these through subjective perspectives and with priorities. We have to understand
concretely how children are obliged to juggle the contradictory conditions of the
teaching with their social relations. Analyzing such connections and contradictory
conditions is part of the generalizing processes.
Our generalizations must be concrete to be relevant in this regard, as this enables
us to follow a dialectical movement. The concrete contradictions in praxis enable us
to understand the content of the conflicts and how they are connected to political
questions, and in this way the conflicts offer possibilities. Finding our way relates to
the priorities we may identify when exploring the subjective meanings of the con-
tradictions. We cannot simply continue doing what we always do; we cannot solve
the contradiction as a problem with a solution. Rather, we must understand what
makes the contradictions incompatible, how they blend together when they are not
attended to, and how we should make them work together in the midst of a con-
stantly moving praxis, which is not solving them. Still, sometimes it is possible to
develop the conditions, and thereby the contradictions, fundamentally. We have
tried to illustrate that the process of generalizing elucidates how a conflict connects
to contradictions and different conditions for working with these. The contradiction
32 E. Axel and C. Højholt
between teaching and the children’s activities in their social life is central in devel-
oping pedagogical strategies and the organization of educational practice.
purifying sense of abstraction is even wrongly taken to mean the same as general-
ization. When we argue that all of us must abstract even when we focus, we under-
stand the process of abstraction more concretely as tied to focusing with others—from
different perspectives—in context: when we focus we select or abstract what we are
concentrating on and spread out our attention to what we perceive as relevant to a
problem in a field. By combining the concepts of abstraction and focus, we see that
Ollman insists on understanding abstraction as our way of selecting something in a
situation but not everything, and with the term focus, he underlines that the selected
focus is formed by its context and forms it. We see that generalization at the same
time is abstracting and focusing, the former simplifying, and the latter concentrating
and dispersing our undertaking in context. We thus simultaneously abstract/simplify
and concretize. In this way, generalization is a dialectical process of selecting con-
textually what is relevant for our problem in praxis.
We can demonstrate this using the previously presented example, in which we
had to concentrate on the situation of the youngsters as well as to “spread out” the
analysis to many related contexts. The researchers were discussing how to under-
stand this situation, and in the ensuing discussion, the dispersed preconditions and
consequences of the disagreement were incorporated according to the specific and
common relevancies of the focus point. One of the common relevancies was the
prolonged school days—a key issue in political conflicts over the school reform.
The school leader worried about the school’s brand and wanted to prevent the pupils
from talking in a negative way about school problems. From the teachers’ perspec-
tive, the ninth graders’ anger was seen as something to take seriously and as an
opportunity to teach the pupils about their democratic possibilities.
From the ninth graders’ perspective, their anger at the same time could be under-
stood as containing their feeling of being constrained and wish to do something
about it. Their anger became a point of focus for the constraining conditions and for
their exploration; their anger was a concentration and spreading out. The constrain-
ing aspect of the anger may contain many other contradictions to explore, like hav-
ing to concentrate and dissipating attention in class, but the ninth graders fell upon
the eighth graders.
The participants select and prioritize different aspects of the incident in the dis-
cussion, according to their perspectives, in exploring how to understand the situa-
tion. In general, teachers must deal with an administrative approach to their
many-sided activities, and they have to accept things whose relevance they may not
agree upon. They will prioritize, and they will engage in discussions about what can
be ignored, what is irrelevant, and what must be kept apart. The focus, or the prob-
lem discussed, forces them to both spread out and concentrate in order to handle the
problem properly. Still, the teachers must insist on incorporating apparently irrele-
vant aspects like the children’s social lives in specific ways in their teaching, in
order to make the teaching work. With this example, we hope to have exemplified
the concepts of focusing, spreading out, selecting and the conflicts about relevance
and to have illustrated how we came to understand the problem in new ways.
There is truth in all perspectives, and as researchers we are not in a privileged
position, but by investigating and trying to systematically integrate the different
34 E. Axel and C. Højholt
If they do not do that, teaching will not work properly. We term this outcome the
“vengeance of the concrete” (Axel 2003). Aspects of praxis that are overlooked by
abstract generalized procedures for evidence-based teaching appear in the teachers’
praxis in class and require attentiveness, ultimately moving praxis in specific direc-
tions. In the presented example, the overlooked contradiction that manifested itself
resulted in a particular type of cooperation, and the teacher conceded to the con-
crete, overlooked aspects of praxis. To struggle with the incompatibilities of teach-
ing and social relations in the common cause of school life is a case of conflictual
cooperation (Axel 2011). With the concept conflictual cooperation we emphasize
how participants cooperate in a common contradictory cause in praxis, in which
contradictions can be handled in different ways, some of which lead to conflict. We
have argued earlier that the common cause forces us to adapt contradictions or
incompatibilities to it, and to arrange or transform them. Thereby, we can under-
stand the intricacies of the common cause by developing it through its contradic-
tions. This also means that we may learn about the intricacies through the conflicts
generated by the contradictions in the common cause, and this is one of the ways in
which we can open up the possibility of developing praxis (Busch-Jensen 2015).
Participants generalizing around a common cause thus perform a practical con-
tradictory endeavor. In everyday school life, the contradiction between teaching and
the children’s social lives does not always lead to more or less severe conflicts.
Mardahl-Hansen (2018) has shown how when teaching in the classroom, teachers
simultaneously organize and reorganize social situations in practical ways—adjust-
ing rules, switching between different foci, keeping focus, engaging as well as
demanding things of children, involving different perspectives and aspects in flexi-
ble ways. This involves practical procedures such as agendas, rules for speaking up,
and lists of things to remember, and it also involves using such things in flexible
ways due to the ongoing exploration of situated challenges in the classroom. For
their part, the children seem to wish for flexibility while at the same time they con-
stantly try hard to restore the focus of their engagement, and they can only combine
the many aspects of their school life by working with the way they focus themselves.
We can find a preliminary answer to this question in Dewey’s notion that “the
things of ordinary experience contain within themselves a mixture of the perilous
and unsettled with the settled and uniform” (1929/1958: x). We see this as a conse-
quence of the fact that we know something but not everything in a context and are
affected by the unknown. Dewey identified two aspects of experience. On the one
hand it is a “limit of movement” based on past activities and on the other a prospec-
tive orientation of the person involving curiosity and experimentation (1911/1985:
448f). We would stress that keeping to the past or being proactive is not only an
isolated act of a person but depends on what the person’s conditions and possibili-
ties for participating in praxis are and how the person can relate to them. Socially
and historically, Dewey saw that the differentiation of experience has developed
problematically into a split of theory and practice (1929/1958: 358), implying that
theory separated from experience leads away from exploration and into the assump-
tion that theory involves direct access to things: “Philosophies have often tried to
forego the actual work that is involved in penetrating the concrete experience, by
setting up a purely theoretical security and certainty” (Dewey 1929/1958: xi).
Again, we would stress that this widespread social phenomenon must be under-
stood not as an individualized matter but as a subjective matter in social praxis: how
we understand and work with theories, whether we believe we should try to apply
them or with Dewey explore with them and their contradictions, depends on our
contradictory social locations, our conditions therein, and the way we relate to these
based on our experience. We will never know everything relevant to our case.
Therefore, we will never know when we must revise our generalizations: we may
put ourselves at risk by sticking to them, and they are never settled once and for all.
This may expose us so that we are at the mercy of events and their conditions in
praxis. How to work with generalizations in research praxis is therefore also a mat-
ter of how we relate systematically to our generalizations and experiences and of
being able to criticize our understandings—by focusing and being flexible in our
exploration of concrete common causes.
Historically, being at the mercy of conditions has made us strive more for cer-
tainty in our generalizations than for elusive mastery. Knowing in praxis how to do
things also makes it possible to instruct others what to do. Instruction may take
place in locations where the things one is talking about are not present. It therefore
becomes common to degrade practical knowledge by stating that it is unstable,
messy, incoherent, and undependable. Accordingly, in such an approach experience
seems to become split between undependable practice, which is approximate and to
be constantly corrected, and on the other hand dependable procedures with trusted
results. In our current secularized society, it has become common to strive for
abstract, one-sided scientific theory, with final statements confirmed by experiments.
Without going into the historical reasons why scientific practice developed so as
to generally favor theory meant for application, we can describe this state of affairs
using Schön’s words:
Science became … a hypothetico-deductive system. In order to account for his observa-
tions, the scientist constructed hypothesis, abstract models of an unseen world which could
be tested only indirectly through deductions susceptible to confirmation or disconfirmation
2 Subjectivity, Conflictuality, and Generalization in Social Praxis 37
by experiment. The heart of scientific inquiry consisted in the use of crucial experiments to
choose among competing theories”. (1983: 33)
References
Axel, E. (2003). Theoretical deliberations on “regulation as productive tool use”. Outlines: Critical
Social Studies, 5(1), 31–46.
Axel, E. (2009). What makes us talk about wing nuts? Critical psychology and subjects at work.
Theory & Psychology, 19(2), 275–295.
Axel, E. (2011). Conflictual cooperation. Nordic Psychology, 63(4), 56–78.
Bernstein, R. J. (1971). Praxis and action. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Busch-Jensen, P. (2015). The production of power in everyday life of organizational practice:
Working with conflicts as heuristics. Outlines, 16(2), 15–25.
2 Subjectivity, Conflictuality, and Generalization in Social Praxis 39
Røn Larsen, M. (2019). Interdisciplinary collaboration and conflict concerning children in difficul-
ties—Conditions, procedures and politics of everyday life in school. Annual Review of Critical
Psychology.
Schön, D. A. (1983). The reflective practitioner: How professionals think in action. London: Arena.
Schraube, E. (2015). Why theory matters: Analytical strategies of critical psychology. Estudos de
Psicologia, 32(3), 533–545. https://doi.org/10.1590/0103-166X2015000300018.
Schraube, E., & Osterkamp, U. (Eds.). (2013). Psychology from the standpoint of the subject:
Selected writings of Klaus Holzkamp. London: Palgrave Macmillan.
Smith, D. E. (2005). Institutional ethnography: A sociology for people. Oxford: AltaMira Press.
Taylor, C. (1975). Hegel. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society: The development of higher psychological processes.
Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Chapter 3
Rethinking Generalization with Kurt
Lewin and Action Research
Martin Dege
Introduction
M. Dege (*)
Department of Psychology, The American University of Paris, Paris, France
e-mail: mdege@aup.edu
that a holistic reading of Lewin would be beneficial, for one because this seems self-
evident to me; at least if you want to do justice to the full body of Lewin’s thought.
The other reason is more practical and guided by the theme of this book. I believe
that from this peculiar combination of the two (or maybe even three) Lewins -
the (theoretical) psychologist and epistemologist, and the Action Researcher
- derives a particular understanding of the politics of research. More concretely, I
believe that Lewin develops a particular understanding of the effects and conse-
quences of research results in the social sciences, that is, their generalization. In so
doing, Lewin envisions a concept of generalization that goes beyond the traditional
equation in psychology where generalization amounts to a question of frequency
(Michell 1999: 39). I am not the only one (Dege 2011) and certainly not the first to
argue this (see, e.g., Beckstead et al. 2009; Tateo 2013; Danziger 1994; Lück 2009,
2001; Schönpflug 1992). However, I believe that, so far, the literature has ignored
the connection between Lewin’s revolutionary thinking in methodology and his
political agenda. I want to argue that we can better grasp the interrelations of action,
change, research, and subjectivity that come to light in his concept of generalization
if we take the political aspects of his work into account. Lewin understood that
generalization of a research practice that consisted of action must itself consist of
action. He understood, so I claim, that research in the social sciences cannot focus
on historically geographically concrete data (Lewin 1936a: 30) to speculate about
events in the present or the future. In other words, for Lewin it seemed clear that—
no matter how sophisticated the research procedure would be, including complex
statistical models—concrete data points from the past could tell us very little about
a future to come. Instead, Lewin understood that we would have to generalize
actions: The core of any social science research project in such manner would be to
increase human agency in any given situation. In turn, the social science endeavor
would be inherently political. It is this political impetus in Lewin’s work that is lost
if his work is split into two. And it is the far-reaching consequences of his ideas that
drop out of sight if researchers fail to relate his work on action research (and his
community work and his work on teacher education) back to his more psychologi-
cal studies and his reflections on the philosophy of science. To show how valuable
such a connection might be, I want to draw a more political picture of Lewin’s work
in the following sections to ultimately show how a concept of generalization as
generalization of human agency naturally follows from his research agenda.
For Kurt Lewin, as for many psychologists of his time, psychology was closely con-
nected to politics. His attempts to change the discipline went hand in hand with his
commitment to building a better world in the face of inexplicable suffering. Like
many of his German colleagues in psychology, he was of Jewish decent (Lewin
1916: 37, 1992: 16) and became the victim of an ever growing anti-Semitism in
Europe, and specifically in Germany. In a letter addressed to Wolfgang Köhler who
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 43
served as the chair of the psychology department in Berlin, Lewin reflects on this
anti-Semitism.
I don’t know whether you realize to what extent the social exclusion of Jews and their
forced restriction to a very few professions actually existed before the war. My parents were
among those few Jews who owned a farm. I therefore know that 100% anti-Semitism of the
coarsest type was taken for granted and constituted the basic stance not only of the landed
aristocracy, but also of the peasants in the surrounding area. (Lewin 1981, 1986: 42)
Despite such experiences early on in his life and like so many other Germans with
a Jewish background, he enlisted in the army as soon as World War I broke out. In
1918, he was injured, discharged from the army and honored with the iron cross.
While in the military, Lewin defended his dissertation in 1916 and published his
first article (Lewin 1917). He was a member of a left-leaning student group during
that time which discussed social issues and organized seminars for workers called
workingmen’s courses. The seminars focused on the general education of the work-
ing class (Marrow 1969: 6/7). Out of this group of students, it was particularly
Hedda and Karl Korsch who developed a close relationship with Lewin. Together
with Karl Korsch, Lewin wrote a paper about the problems of using mathematical
formulas in social psychology (Lewin and Korsch 1939), and he also published an
article about Frederick Taylor’s concept of scientific management in Korsch’s jour-
nal (Lewin 1920). Together with Hans Rupp, he worked on attitude measurement in
the textile industry (Lewin and Rupp 1928a, b) in the hopes to improve the working
conditions of the mostly female employees.
Most of these politically charged activities early on in Lewin’s career are typi-
cally downplayed or ignored in favor of his more academic (and experimental) work
during the 1920s until the early 1940s, when he established himself as an academic
psychologist in the USA. However, a close reading of his academic work shows the
same impetus, it points into a similar direction.
As such, Lewin’s turn to experimental psychology and problems of volition mea-
surement (Lewin 1916, 1922a, b) was at least to some extent forced upon him as a
prerequisite to secure a position in academia (Métraux 1992). The first version of
his Habilitationsschrift (Lewin 1921)—a second qualifying thesis after the PhD
required in Germany at the time to receive the venia legendi (the right to teach)—
submitted in 1919 or 1920, was rejected by the Berlin department. Why he was first
rejected remains subject to speculation; it is however safe to say that the committee
was unhappy with the direction Lewin had chosen for his research. Lewin later
passed his Habilitation to become a university professor on the basis of an extended
version of his dissertation (Lewin 1922b).1
After his Habilitation, Lewin taught at the Berlin Institute, offering classes in
psychology and philosophy, and developed his field theory. Facing rapid political
changes in Europe, Lewin would eventually be forced to leave Berlin. Thanks to his
American student Junius Flagg Brown who published a paper entitled “The methods
For details about the rejection and eventual acceptance of Lewin’s Habilitationsschrift, see
1
Métraux (1983).
44 M. Dege
The central argument of “The conflict between Aristotelian and Galileian modes of
thought in contemporary psychology” (Lewin 1931b) was indeed revolutionary for
American academic psychology at the time. Lewin argued for psychology as an
idiographic science: Psychological laws, so he claimed, cannot be generated from
huge studies with large samples, but rather from investigating the single individual
in its wholeness (De Rivera 1976: 18). In many ways, this paper is the first articula-
tion of a reinvention of the concept of generalization (Tateo 2013). Lewin’s concept
of an ideographic psychology was fully unfolded, eventually, in his Principles of
Topological Psychology (Henle 1984) which he translated into English during the
summers of 1934 and 1935 with the help of Fritz and Grace Heider (Lewin 1936a).
The book—and specifically the translation—is notoriously difficult to read; a fact
that most likely contributed to its ultimate failure on the academic market. Lewin
himself acknowledged this fact and spoke of the book as an unfinished product of “a
very long growth” (Lewin 1936a: vii). In the book, Lewin presented his concept of
Topological Psychology, an approach to understand human (inter)action based on
his field theory. Lewin wrote:
The person is to be represented as a connected region which is separated from the environ-
ment by a Jordan curve. Within this region there are part regions. One can begin by distin-
guishing as such parts the inner-personal regions […] from the motor and perceptual region
[…]. The motor and perceptual region has the position of a boundary-zone between the
inner-personal regions and the environment. (Lewin 1936a: 177)
2
See Adams interviewed by Marrow, specifically the creation of the term “valence” which trans-
lated the German “Aufforderungscharacter” and quickly became adopted by Tolman as a replace-
ment for his concept of “demand value” and later even translated back to German as “Valenz”
(Marrow 1969: 56–57). The “affordance” concept as discussed today in technology studies and
first introduced by Gibson also draws on Lewin’s Aufforderungscharakter (Gibson 1977, 2015).
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 45
Passages as these contribute to the typical reading of Lewin’s body of work within
the discipline of psychology. He is largely regarded as a theorist who contributed to
Gestalt psychology and founded his own school of vector psychology (also called
field or topological psychology); an approach that is considered to carry historical
value only (Ash 1992). While it is true that vector psychology is not an active field
of development in psychology today, it allowed Lewin to rethink the concept of
generalization from the standpoint of a theoretical critique of his discipline. As I
have outlined above, however, this is not the end of the story: Lewin was concerned
with and strongly influenced by political issues early on in his career. Even more so,
his political activities intensified after he had migrated to the United States (van
Elteren 1993).
Among other things, Lewin’s political agenda is visible in his attempts to estab-
lish a psychology department at the Hebrew university in Palestine. During February
1935, Lewin wrote two papers (Lewin 1935a, b; see also Bargal 1998) to outline his
ideas for research in Palestine in general and for the psychology institute to be
founded in particular.
A Department of Psychology in the Hebrew University is an essential unit of the cultural,
educational and practical services of the University […]. Its research work will begin by
concentrating upon the psychological problems connected with immigration, social adapta-
tion and the processes by which Jews from different parts of the world integrate into a single
cultural community. […] Because Palestine is a concentrated area in which there come
together a great variety of people of diverse and conflicting cultural backgrounds, it will be
possible to undertake fundamental studies in certain problems of social fusion and adjust-
ment which are characteristic of social and cultural history everywhere. (Lewin 1935a: 1–2)
Lewin suggested to closely examine several topics: the relationship between immi-
grants from different countries, the lack of a common language, the impact of a
more collectivist society found in the kibbutzim on immigrants with more individu-
alistic cultural backgrounds, the influence of ideology—specifically Zionism—on
the individual. For Lewin, theory, methodology, and politics are deeply connected:
I personally find especially intriguing endeavours to coordinate with the field-studies exper-
imental studies of the factors that condition the opinions and transformation of ideologies;
of the effects of cultural and social homogeneity and non-homogeneity on the structure of
a group; of the effect of cultural differences on work; etc. (1935b: 4)
These descriptions carry the seeds of what Lewin would later call Action Research.
Had he been able to secure funding for his project at Hebrew University, the history
of Action Research in the Lewinian tradition might have started some 10 years ear-
lier. However, creating a psychology institute at Hebrew University did not work
out, Lewin gave up on his attempts to secure funding and the university on its own
was not able to provide the salary Lewin was asking for, let alone offer the kinds of
research funds necessary to conduct Lewin’s projects.3
3
The faith of psychology at Hebrew University took a different turn after negotiations with Lewin
had failed: In 1939 Joseph Bonaventura was appointed Professor of Psychology at Hebrew
University. However, according to the university archives he did not teach in psychology and
focused on education instead. Only in 1941, psychology was approved as a secondary field of
46 M. Dege
Instead of Hebrew University, Lewin moved to Iowa with a research grand from
the Rockefeller foundation with the amount of $90,000 per year (Ash 1992: 201).
At Iowa, Lewin was quick to establish research networks such as the famous
Quasselstrippe—the hot air club (Marrow 1969: 88). The Topology Group which he
founded around the same time met annually even long after his death; the last meet-
ing took place in 1964 (Marrow 1969: 111–115). The group quickly grew to a meet-
ing place for some of the most influential thinkers in psychology and the social
sciences. Thanks to Lewin’s benefactor Lawrence Frank, the Rockefeller Foundation
covered all expenses. Among the participants were Donald K. Adams, Karl E. Zener,
Edward C. Tolman, David Krech, Tamara Dembo, Erik Erikson, Lawrence Frank
himself, Fritz and Grace Heider, Wolfgang Köhler, Donald W. MacKinnon, Margret
Mead, William Stern, and others.
The freedom at Iowa and its intellectually rich atmosphere allowed Lewin to
establish himself in the USA. Lewin continued his reflections on the methodology
of psychology and published several papers during his Iowa time. In 1935, Lewin
elaborated his concept of life space and social space that indicate his growing interest
in social psychology (Lewin 1935c). He also worked on measurement theory in
combination with his field theory in “The conceptual representation and the mea-
surement of psychological forces” (Lewin 1938). Most of his other publications
during this time period speak the same language. In 1939, he published a paper
together with Karl Korsch in which he describes the tasks for psychology on three
levels: experimental research, formalization and mathematization, and inventing
dynamic constructs (Lewin and Korsch 1939). Yet another article published in the
American Journal of Sociology that same year focused on the advances of a formal-
ized approach to the social world and efforts to make various approaches more com-
mensurable (Lewin 1939b). Lewin writes:
[The commensurability of various approaches] can be accomplished by the use of con-
structs which characterize objects and events in terms of interdependence rather than of
phenotypical similarity or dissimilarity. It may seem that emphasizing interdependence
will make the problem of classification even more difficult because, generally, it is more
difficult to describe a fact in terms of its effect on others and its being affected by others
(its conditional-genetic properties) than in terms of its appearance (phenotypical proper-
ties). However, as soon as one grasps the idea, it becomes evident that if one character-
izes an object or event by the way it affects the situation, every type of fact is placed on
the same level and becomes interrelated to any other fact which affects the situation.
(1939b: 888)
specialization for BA students. No experimental psychology existed at the university until the end
of World War II (Bargal 1998: 65). A psychology department was not established until 1957,
10 years after Lewin’s untimely death.
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 47
structures […] that occur beneath observation and description.” Lewin realized that
“the focus on essential structures moves us from breaking phenomena apart and
studying elements in isolation to a systemic orientation that is oriented towards”
what Beckstead et al. call “systemic causality” (Beckstead et al. 2009: 71): Lewin
moved away from a variable centered psychology; he realized that a generalization
of phenotypical properties on average cannot lead to proper results. Instead his
psychology is concerned with the effects of what he calls ‘facts’ rather than the
ontology of those facts. In this vein, he describes the “Formalization and Progress
in Psychology”:
[T]o make oneself master of the forces of this vast scientific continent one has to fulfill a
rather peculiar task. The ultimate goal is to establish a network of highways and superhigh-
ways, so that any important point may be linked easily with any other. This network of
highways will have to be adapted to the natural topography of the country and will thus
itself be a mirror of its structure and of the position of its resources. (1940: 11)
In many ways, the appeal of Lewin’s work to (some, theoretically inclined, critical,
etc.) psychologists today is reflected in the above quotation. Lewin provides a very
early critique of variable-centered psychology; a critique that is in many respects
still applicable today. Furthermore, he elaborates his alternative on his profound
expertise in methodology and the philosophy of science. And he promises a clear,
scientific, and formalized way in his attempts to “find a mathematization which
adequately represents this dynamic interdependence between psychological pro-
cesses” (Lewin and Korsch 1939: 398). It is this keen interest in formalization and
in solving methodological problems that most reconceptualizations of generaliza-
tion draw upon. Tateo, for example, argues that, following Lewin, “generalization is
a conceptual abstraction, establishing meaningful relationships between the parts of
a whole” (Tateo 2013: 534). In a similar vein, Beckstead et al. argue that “Post-
Galilean thought not only denied the epistemological treatment of generalization
through ‘frequency’ but also changed the locus of causation away from the intrinsic
properties of the object to the structural relationships between objects” (Beckstead
et al. 2009: 79). While I do not see anything wrong with either of these conclusions,
I contend that they fall short of Lewin’s own approach to generalization as he shaped
it over the course of the final years of his career.
The famous experiments on autocracy and democracy Lewin conducted during the
late 1930s and early 1940s together with his students Ronald Lippitt and Ralph
White (Lewin et al. 1939; Lippitt 1940; White and Lippitt 1960), influenced Lewin’s
future work in two significant ways. First, he turned more strongly to the social
world and to groups, a shift in his work that had already started with his paper on
minority research in 1935 (Lewin 1935c). Second, Lewin became more involved in
48 M. Dege
a public debate on democracy and democratic education that reached beyond the
dominant discourse in American psychology at the time toward a more transdisci-
plinary, action-oriented, and political approach. In 1939, shortly before the outbreak
of World War II, Lewin wrote a clairvoyant paper entitled “When facing danger,”
the general tone of which can perhaps be summarized in one quote: “[T]hose who
are interested in democracy,” Lewin attested, “need to realize that there is but one
of two alternatives, either to live as slaves under Fascism, or to be ready to die for
democracy” (Lewin 1997b: 116). His concern with the fate of the Jewish population
not just in Europe but all over the world also directly translated into his research. He
realized that researching the individual alone will not accomplish any change on a
broader scale. Instead, it seemed more promising to study the interaction of groups
with other groups, specifically if interaction patterns between minority and majority
groups were to be understood. Lewin writes:
If it has ever been a question whether the Jewish problem is an individual or a social one, a
clear-cut answer was provided by the S. A. men [S. A. was the acronym for Sturmabteilung,
the paramilitary organization of the National Socialist German Workers’ Party (NSDAP),
M.D.] in the streets of Vienna who beat with steel rods any Jew irrespective of his past
conduct or status. Jews all over the world now recognize that the Jewish problem is a social
problem. (1997b: 117)
Also, Lewin realized that change cannot be brought about by changing the respec-
tive minority or majority alone. Instead “[I]t should be understood that any under-
privileged minority is preserved as such by the more privileged majority” (Lewin
1997b: 117). There is a “need of the majority for a scapegoat […] [A need that]
grows out of tension, e.g. from an economic depression. […] No ‘logical’ argument
will destroy these basic forces” (Lewin 1997b: 118). Lewin realized that the prob-
lem of the Jewish people and, more broadly, the problem of minorities cannot be
singlehandedly resolved by science proper. Instead, “the Jew will have to realize
that for him (sic) as well as for any other underprivileged group the following state-
ment holds: Only the efforts of the group itself will achieve the emancipation of the
group” (Lewin 1997b: 118). As such, Lewin believed that to emancipate a group,
one first needs to invest in the strengths and inner cohesion of the group itself
because such a “group will have an organic life of its own. It will show organization
and inner strength.” In contrast, a “minority kept together only from outside is in
itself chaotic. It is composed of a mass of individuals without inner relations with
each other, a group unorganized and weak” (Lewin 1997b: 119). The emancipation
of a group “would be more than a self-centered act. It would have a direct bearing
upon the struggle of the majority for the solution of their economic and political
problems” (Lewin 1997b: 121).
In the following years, Lewin’s research concentrated on topics such as group
dynamics (Lewin 1939a), social change (Lewin 1943a), and action research (Lewin
1943b, 1946). With an increasing amount of funding that Lewin was able to secure,
he inaugurated two research centers. In the first months of 1945, Lewin established
the Research Center for Group Dynamics at M.I.T. and the Commission on
Community Interrelations (CCI) of the American Jewish Congress located in
New York City.
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 49
Naturally, Lewin was interested in combining the work of the two institutes.
Most of his students, such as Lippitt, Radke, Festinger, French Jr., and Cartwright
were involved in both the projects (Marrow 1969: 173). Lewin also kept close rela-
tionships with Douglas McGregor and Charles Myers at MIT as well as Henry
Murray and Gordon Allport at Harvard. The Research Center for Group Dynamics
was mainly concerned with positive and negative forces at work in human groups.
Lewin himself described the goals and research prospects of the center in an article
published in Sociometry in 1945. The Center should investigate “the forces which
bring about change or which resist change.” He insisted that “all aspects of group
life would have to be taken into consideration.” Further, Lewin claims absolute
independence for his project: “[T]he study of group life should be independent of
the way in which society is accustomed to classify a particular group phenomenon.”
He envisions a “systematic scientific approach” for the Center which “follow[s]
comparative lines.” This approach includes the “use of whatever qualitative or quan-
titative psychological, sociological, or anthropological methods […] are needed for
investigation.” This could only be achieved, so Lewin argues, if “theories [are kept]
abreast and partly ahead of the gathering of data” (Lewin 1945a: 130–131). As such,
the Research Center for Group Dynamics was envisioned with a primary focus on
theoretical development and empirical application to gain results which would
explain the basics of group functioning.4
The Commission on Community Interrelations, in contrast, had a strong focus on
applying scientific knowledge to existing social issues. The American Jewish
Congress (AJC) as the central provider of funds used the Commission as their tool
to investigate the ongoing struggles of public concern. The AJC itself was originally
established to help European Jews in America after World War I and to advocate
civil rights and equality for Jews (Cherry and Borshuk 1998: 121). This focus
broadened however specifically during World War II when American liberals began
to fear that forms of fascism and racism could become more dominant in the United
States. These fears were specifically underlined by Gunnar Myrdal’s study about
race inequality in the United States (Myrdal et al. 1944; Jackson 1994; McLean
1946: 159). Following these results, “Jewish Congress leaders perceived the need
for a more broadly based attack on discrimination and prejudice. Indeed, the
American Jewish Congress’ leadership adopted the principle of ‘collective secu-
rity’; an assault on anyone’s constitutional rights was now [a] just cause for the
Jewish Congress to come to the defence of the injured party or group” (Frommer
1978: 540). Such attacks on the constitutional rights of people should be contested
not only with the means of the law itself, but also with social sciences. As such, the
CCI from the beginning set out to use social science knowledge to improve the life
circumstances not only of the Jewish population in the United States but of minority
groups in general. A self-description published in the Weekly Congress, the main
Journal of the AJC, reads like this:
4
A good illustration of the way in which group dynamics were approached at the Center can be
found in (Lewin 1947a, b). An extended list of the publications during Lewin’s time at MIT can be
found in Marrow (1969: 277–284).
50 M. Dege
There are other organizations, Jewish and non-Jewish, engaged in this work. The question
the layman is entitled to ask is: What innovation will the new Commission bring into the
general strategy? The answer is knowledge of facts. In the struggle against anti-Semitism
two fundamental issues are involved: the safety of Jewish life and—what is of greater
importance to all people—the ability of democracies to build a better world. […] What the
Commission on Community Interrelations proposes to do is to acquire precise and thorough
knowledge of facts and to proceed with action based upon the facts. (Lewin 1945b: 4–5)
The facts needed “to build a better world” are to be gathered in a scientific manner.
The aim is to “take the struggle against prejudice out of the realm of hope, faith,
opinion and guesswork and place it within the scope of scientific measurement and
scientific fact” (Interrelations 1945: 3–4). The credo is “no action without research,
no research without action” (Lewin 1945b: 5). For Lewin, the CCI offered a “new
approach to old problems,” and its methods could be the “infra-red rays of social
science” (Lewin 1945c: 7). His hope was to effectively combine immediate action
and long-range research to generate effective responses to social problems: “[W]e
do not want that type of so-called ‘realistic policy’ which lives from day to day. […]
Any constructive plan must see both the long range goal and the day by day action.
It should see not only the local situation […] but also the broader issues and social
forces” (Lewin 1945c: 6).
In the last year of his life, Lewin became involved with the Tavistock Institute in
London which was founded by Eric Trist, whom Lewin had met during the APA
congress in 1929 at Yale University, and the British psychologist A. T. M. Wilson.
Together, they established the Journal Human Relations. Lewin had originally
planned to spend the summer of 1947 at the Tavistock Institute in London. On the
evening of February 11, 1947, however Lewin fell sick. The family doctor diag-
nosed a minor heart attack and advised Lewin to go to the hospital the following
day. But before he could leave the house the next morning, another heart attack
stroke him. This time it was fatal.
The purpose of the sections above was to shed some light on the complexities of
Kurt Lewin’s research from his very first projects in Germany to his role as a coor-
dinator of several large-scale research projects later and until he died. As I have tried
to show, Lewin’s career cannot be understood independently from the historical
circumstances he had to witness. Neither can it be understood without tying all the
ends together: Kurt Lewin the psychologist, Kurt Lewin the methodologist and phi-
losopher of science, and Kurt Lewin the politically engaged citizen. I have already
pointed to a specific reading of Lewin’s concept of generalization that is indeed
revolutionary for psychology (and other social sciences that follow the variable-
centered model, see Beckstead et al. 2009; De Rivera 1976; Tateo 2013). And I have
also indicated that, in my view, this understanding is not radical enough. To elabo-
rate my point, I will briefly go over Lewin’s philosophy of science and clarify his
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 51
understanding of generalization and how this understanding carries the potential
to reflect scientific debates in the political realm.
During the time in Germany as well as in the first years in America, Lewin had
strong affinities to the left and was inspired by Marxist thought. When he began to
develop Action Research, however, Lewin had turned toward liberalism and became
an advocate of American liberal democracy. This shift occurred not only in Lewin’s
thought but seemed to be a general phenomenon of the time and the way in which
essential events were interpreted, that shaped social psychology in the United States
before, during, and after.
Lewin established field theory and topological or vector psychology toward the
end of his Berlin years (published in his magnum opus during the first years in the
USA (Lewin 1936a)), largely on the basis of his background in phenomenology that
he inherited from his PhD advisor Carl Stumpf (1992: 15). As such, Lewin’s psy-
chology offers a combination of phenomenology (Lewin 1917), sociological meta-
theory (Lewin 1943a), empirical and mathematical rigor (Lewin and Korsch 1939),
and applied psychology (Lewin 1943b). It can be said that Lewin conceived of
psychology as a tripartite system: theorizing, which for the psychologist was
enriched and at the same time substantiated by experimental research, and applied
psychology. The often quoted line “there is nothing so practical as a good theory”
(Lewin 1997a: 288) is frequently misread and seems to suggest that Lewin gave a
primacy to theory. However, the full quote reveals Lewin’s critique of the “pure
theoretician.” Instead he advocated mutually constitutive relationships between
theory and (political) practice.
It would be most unfortunate if the trend toward theoretical psychology were weakened by
the necessity of dealing with natural groups when studying certain problems of social psy-
chology. One should not be blind, however, to the fact that this development offers great
opportunities as well as threats to theoretical psychology. The greatest handicap of applied
psychology has been the fact that, without proper theoretical help, it had to follow the
costly, inefficient, and limited method of trial and error. Many psychologists working today
in an applied field are keenly aware of the need for close cooperation between theoretical
and applied psychology. This can be accomplished in psychology, as it has been accom-
plished in physics, if the theorist does not look toward applied problems with highbrow
aversion or with a fear of social problems, and if the applied psychologist realizes that there
is nothing so practical as a good theory. (1997a: 288)
From the very beginning of his works, Lewin was well aware of the necessity to
bridge the gap between theory and applied research. He realized that a systematic
approach to the problems of the social sciences can only be successful, if it mean-
ingfully combines theory and praxis. And this combination is, for Lewin, possible
because “Kant in his Copernican Turn, transformed the question of ‘is insight
(Erkenntnis) possible’ into ‘how is insight (Erkenntnis) possible.’” For Lewin, it is
the transformation from speculative science to phenomenological science, “a sci-
ence which—instead of being based on a few presupposed axioms—takes its start-
ing point in the concrete, existing (vorliegenden) objects” (Lewin 1927: 375).
Lewin’s goal was to capture the subject under investigation as an empirical whole—
and that whole had to be lawful. Put differently, Lewin realized that every form of
52 M. Dege
5
Cassirer’s philosophy provides the grounds for Lewin’s reflections in many ways; Cassirerian
philosophy shines through in many places and is explicitly mentioned several times throughout
Lewin’s writings (Lewin 1931b, 1947a, b).
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 53
Progress thus always means to invent new methods and new theories which will at
first inevitably be considered “unscientific” or “illogical” because
like social taboos, a scientific taboo is kept up not so much by a rational argument as by a
common attitude among scientists: Any member of the scientific guild who does not strictly
adhere to the taboo is looked upon as queer; he is suspected of not adhering to the scientific
standards of critical thinking. (Lewin 1999: 28)
The young (pre-war) Lewin believed in a final scientific revolution which would
bring about unity for his discipline or even the social sciences in general. Galilei
achieved this for physics—in Cassirer’s interpretation which Lewin follows—and
clearly Lewin felt that his field theory represented the Galilean/Copernican revolu-
tion for the social sciences in “that it has shifted the previous logical constants […],
that it has set them at another place than before” (Cassirer 1923: 373; Lewin 1936a).
And indeed, the Aristotelian mode of thought, which Lewin described as dominant
in psychology in his 1931 paper (Lewin 1931a, b: 158) is framed as a diminishing
relic of the past in his later writings (Lewin 1947a, b, 1949). The Aristotelian
approach is nothing but “anthropomorphic and inexact. […] It classes many things
with very slight or unimportant relationships together and separates things that
objectively are closely and importantly related” (Lewin 1931b: 142; Brown 1935).
For Lewin, distinctions in psychology such as “pathological” and “normal” or
“personality” and “social” psychology are an expression of this Aristotelian, anthro-
pomorphic view, since logically all these fields are heavily intertwined (Lewin
1936a: 5). “Psychology speaks of the ‘errors’ of children, of ‘practice,’ of ‘forget-
ting,’ thus classifying whole groups of processes according to the value of their
products, instead of according to the nature of the psychological processes involved”
(Lewin 1931b: 143). Instead, psychology must “yield to a conception which seeks
to derive the same laws for all these fields, and to classify the whole field on the
basis of other, essentially functional, differences” (Lewin 1931b: 144). Lewin is
convinced that “[w]e are to return to the making of speculative ‘systems’ [to avoid]
a blind collecting that splits the field of psychology into a number of unrelated
branches” (Lewin 1936a: 5). A flexible system is needed to unite the various sub-
fields of psychology. It would need to be oriented in two directions, namely toward
theoretical connectedness and empirical concreteness. It would have to be equally
suitable for the representation of general laws and the characteristics of the indi-
vidual case (Lewin 1936a: 5). It would in turn allow for the dissociation of “gener-
alization” and “frequency,” since every behavior would be considered lawful and
would thus be a reflection of a general structure that represents not attributes of
subjects on average but the network of conditions under which something occurs.
The distinction between lawful behavior and chance—that is, the idea that parts of
the variance are explained while others are random occurrences—is therefore
reversed. Instead of looking for empirical instances that follow a scientific law,
Lewin sets the law as the premise and argues that everything follows a particular
law. The single case, regardless of its frequency of occurrence, must be considered
lawful (Lewin 1931b: 150). In the same way, the nature of an object or construct
cannot be determined by its “membership in a certain conceptual class.” Objects in
54 M. Dege
the Galilean mode of thought are not determined by their classification but by their
relation to each other (Lewin 1931b: 149). While this could easily be turned into an
argument against quantitative approaches in psychology, for Lewin this is not the
case. The problem is not simply one of mathematization, it is the way in which
mathematics and statistics are applied in the Aristotelian mode: “Lawfulness is
believed to be related to regularity, and considered the antithesis of the individual
case” (Lewin 1931b: 154).
“Frequency of occurrence” poses a central problem in psychology, namely that
knowledge based on empirical data collected in such a manner is inherently histori-
cally and geographically determined (Lewin 1936a: 30); it relies on data of past
occurrences in specific locations—it assumes that the past is predestined to repeat
itself. Generalization in this mode of thought becomes a measure of the extent to
which the present can be described as mirroring some event in the past.
The determination of the cases to be placed in a statistical group is essentially on historic-
geographic grounds. For a group defined in historic-geographic terms, perhaps the one-
year-old children of Vienna or New York in the year 1928, averages are calculated which
are doubtless of the greatest significance to the historian or to the practical school man, but
which do not lose their dependence upon the “accidents” of the historic-geographic given
even though one go [sic] on to an average of the children of Germany, of Europe, or of the
whole world, or of a decade instead of a year. Such an extension of the geographic and
historic basis does not do away with the specific dependence of this concept upon the fre-
quency with which the individual cases occur within historically-geographically defined
fields. (Lewin 1931b: 157)
For Lewin “the content of a law cannot then be determined by the calculation of
averages of historically given cases.” Laws generated in such a manner apply “to an
‘average’ situation. But there just is no such thing as an ‘average situation’ any more
than an average child” (Lewin 1931b: 172). From a Galilean perspective, historical
frequency is a mere “accident” and a “matter of chance” (Lewin 1931b: 162) and
can only be generalized on average; it reports a potential future that is precondi-
tioned upon certain assumptions about the past (Beckstead et al. 2009: 66). Leaving
the Aristotelian point of view behind, Lewin turns to the dynamics of life, because
“[o]nly by the concrete whole which comprises the object and the situation are the
vectors which determine the dynamics of the event defined” (Lewin 1931b: 165).
From this viewpoint, the psychologist aspires to “comprehend the whole situation
involved, with all its characteristics, as precisely as possible” (Lewin 1931b: 166).
Again, Lewin’s concept of psychological research is not a negation of quantita-
tive research nor does it express a strong preference for what we call qualitative
research today. Even more so, Lewin is not arguing for a special interest in the sin-
gle event or the individual subject alone. Deconstructing historically-geographically
concrete data as what they are—events of the past—allows for a critical discussion
of their generalizability. In Galilean terms, there is no reason to assume that past
events will reoccur—independently of their frequency. This however does not mean
that psychological research cannot be generalized or that generalizability is a con-
cept unsuitable to psychological research. On the contrary, “[t]his step to the general
is automatically and immediately given. […] Instead of a reference to the abstract
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 55
event is no longer related to the isolated object as such, but is seen to be dependent upon the
whole situation in which the event occurs. (Lewin 1931b: 164)
determines the situation in that it produces effects that determine the psychological
reality: “What is real is what has effects” (Lewin 1936a: 19). Consequently, “the
situation must be represented in the way in which it is ‘real’ for the individual in
question, that is, as it affects him [sic]” (Lewin 1936a: 25), because it is the person
in their life-space who determines the “degrees of freedom” (Lewin 1936b: 272).
Lewin is not interested in attitudes, states, and trades of the person. Instead, he
wants to understand the very situation in which agency is shaped dynamically as an
interplay of the subject and the situational forces: “A dynamic psychology has to
represent the personality and the state of a person as the total of possible and not
possible ways of behaving” (Lewin 1936a: 14).
For Lewin, subjectivity is not a composition of historical facts, nor should it be
understood as “nothing more than an abstraction—a being who properly should be
described as a cross section of the groups to which he belongs” (Lewin 1939a: 21).
Instead it is the very subjectivity produced in the dynamics of a specific situation
which presents the starting point of psychological investigations. From there, psy-
chological research, be it with individuals or with groups, follows a specific pattern:
The subjective life space is investigated with respect to its “facts,” i.e., everything
that “matters” for the particular person or group. This procedure creates an account
of the actions taken by the person or group and the subjectively following steps. In
case of a conflict, the resolution depends on the analysis of the subjective life spaces
of the parties involved, paired with an analysis of the objective situation, i.e., all the
possible actions in the very situation which is used in order to “communicate to
each other the structure of their life spaces with the object of equalizing them”
(Lewin 1947a: 12) to create a shared subjectivity as a generalization from the situa-
tion. As such, the analysis of group conflict “swings from an analysis of ‘perception
to that of ‘action,’ from the ‘subjective’ to the ‘objective’ and back again” (Lewin
1947a: 12–13). Generalization in those terms is not a generalization of research
results, nor a generalization on average. It is the generalization of individualized
potentialities within a particular life-space. As such, Lewin lays the grounds to
rethink generalization as a tool in the hands of the research subjects that enables
them to understand and shape their individual life-space agentively.
References
Ash, M. G. K. (1992). Cultural contexts and scientific change in psychology. American
Psychologist, 47(2), 198–207.
Bargal, D. (1998). Kurt Lewin and the first attempts to establish a department of psychology at the
Hebrew University. Minerva, 36(1), 49–68.
Bargal, D. (2006). Personal and intellectual influences leading to Lewin’s paradigm of action
research: Towards the 60th anniversary of Lewin’s ‘action research and minority problems’
(1946). Action Research, 4(4), 367–388.
Beckstead, Z., Cabell, K. R., & Valsiner, J. (2009). Generalizing through conditional analysis:
Systemic causality in the world of eternal becoming. Humana. Mente, 3(11), 65–80.
58 M. Dege
Brown, J. F. (1929). The methods of professor Lewin in the psychology of action and affection.
Psychological Review, 36, 200–221.
Brown, J. F. (1935). Towards a theory of social dynamics. Journal of Social Psychology, 6(2),
182–213.
Cassirer, E. (1910). Substanzbegriff und Funktionsbegriff. Untersuchungen über die Grundlagen
der Erkenntniskritik. Berlin: Bruno Cassirer.
Cassirer, E. (1923). Substance and function and Einstein’s theory of relativity (W. Curtis Swabey
& M. Collins Swabey, Trans.). Chicago: Open Court.
Cherry, F., & Borshuk, C. (1998). Social action research and the commission on community
Interrelations. Journal of Social Issues, 54(1), 119–142.
Danziger, K. (1994). Constructing the subject: Historical origins of psychological research.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
De Rivera, J. (1976). Field theory as human-science: Contributions of Lewin’s Berlin group.
New York: Gardener Press.
Dege, M. (2011). Kurt Lewins Action-Research-Konzept als empirische Grundlage einer histo-
rischen, konkreten Psychologie. (German). Erwägen Wissen Ethik, 22(1), 24–27.
Frommer, M. (1978). The American Jewish congress: A history 1914–1950. Columbus, OH: Ohio
State University.
Gibson, J. J. (1977). The theory of affordances. In R. Shaw & J. Bransford (Eds.), Perceiving, act-
ing and knowing (pp. 67–82). Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Gibson, J. J. (2015). The ecological approach to visual perception. New York: Psychology Press.
Henle, M. (1984). Robert M. Ogden and Gestalt psychology in America. Journal of the History of
the Behavioral Sciences, 20(1), 9–19.
Interrelations, C. O. C. (Ed.). (1945). Proposed CCI Manual.
Jackson, W. A. (1994). Gunnar Myrdal and America’s conscience: Social engineering and racial
liberalism, 1938–1987. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press.
Lewin, K. (1916). Die psychische Tätigkeit bei der Hemmung von Willensvorgängen und das
Grundgesetz der Assoziation. Leipzig: J. A. Barth.
Lewin, K. (1917). Kriegslandschaft. Zeitschrift für angewandte Psychologie, 12, 440–447.
Lewin, K. (1920). Die Sozialisierung des Taylorsystems. Eine grundsätzliche Untersuchung zur
Arbeits- und Berufs-Psychologie. Praktischer Sozialismus, 4.
Lewin, K. (1921). Der Begriff der Genese in Physik, Biologie und Entwicklungsgeschichte. Berlin:
Springer.
Lewin, K. (1922a). Das Problem der Willensmessung und das Grundgesetz der Assoziation I.
Psychologische Forschung, 1, 191–302.
Lewin, K. (1922b). Das Problem der Willensmessung und das Grundgesetz der Assoziation, II.
Psychologische Forschung, 2(1), 65–140. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02412947.
Lewin, K. (1927). Gesetz und Experiment in der Psychologie Symposion. Philosophische
Zeitschrift für Forschung und Aussprache, 4(1), 375–421.
Lewin, K. (1931a). Der Übergang von der aristotelischen zur galileischen Denkweise in Biologie
und Psychologie. Erkenntnis, 1, 421–466.
Lewin, K. (1931b). The conflict between Aristotelian and Galileian modes of thought in contem-
porary psychology. Journal of General Psychology, 5, 141–177.
Lewin, K. (1935a). Project for a Department of Psychology and a Psychological Laboratory in the
Hebrew University in Jerusalem, Palestine.
Lewin, K. (1935b). Research problems for a Psychological Institute at the University of Jerusalem.
Lewin, K. (1935c). Psycho-sociological problems of a minority group. Character and Personality,
3(3), 175–187. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-6494.1935.tb01996.x.
Lewin, K. (1936a). Principles of topological psychology. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Lewin, K. (1936b). Some social-psychological differences between the United States and Germany.
Character and Personality, 4(4), 265–293. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-6494.1936.
tb02034.x.
3 Rethinking Generalization with Kurt Lewin and Action Research 59
Lewin, K. (1938). The conceptual representation and the measurement of psychological forces.
Contributions to Psychological Theory, 1(4), 247.
Lewin, K. (1939a). Experiments in social space. Harvard Educational Review, 9(1), 21–32.
Lewin, K. (1939b). Field theory and experiment in social psychology: Concepts and methods. The
American Journal of Sociology, 44(6), 868–896. https://doi.org/10.2307/2769418.
Lewin, K. (1940). Formalization and progress in psychology. University of Iowa Studies in Child
Welfare, 16(3), 7–42.
Lewin, K. (1943a). Cultural reconstruction. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 38(2),
166–173.
Lewin, K. (1943b). Forces behind food habits and methods of change. In C. E. Guthe & M. Mead
(Eds.), The problem of changing food habits: Report of the committee on food habits 1941–
1943 (pp. 35–65). Washington, DC: National Research Council of the National Academy of
Sciences.
Lewin, K. (1945a). The Research Center for Group Dynamics at Massachusetts Institute of
Technology. Sociometry, 8(2), 126–136. https://doi.org/10.2307/2785233.
Lewin, K. (1945b). An action program. Congress Weekly, 4–5.
Lewin, K. (1945c). A new approach to old problems. Congress Weekly, 6–7.
Lewin, K. (1946). Action research and minority problems. Journal of Social Issues, 2(4), 34–46.
Lewin, K. (1947a). Frontiers in group dynamics: Concept, method and reality in social sci-
ence; social equilibria and social change. Human Relations, 1(1), 5–41. https://doi.
org/10.1177/001872674700100103.
Lewin, K. (1947b). Frontiers in group dynamics: II. Channels of group life; social planning and action
research. Human Relations, 1(2), 143–153. https://doi.org/10.1177/001872674700100201.
Lewin, K. (1949). Cassirer’s philosophy of science and the social sciences. In P. A. Schilpp (Ed.),
The philosophy of Ernst Cassirer (pp. 269–288). Evanston: Library of Living Philosophers.
Lewin, K. (1981). Kein Ort, an dem man aufrecht leben kann. Psychologie heute, 8(6), 50–56.
Lewin, K. (1986). “Everything within me rebels”: A letter from Kurt Lewin to Wolfgang Köhler,
1933. Journal of Social Issues, 42(4), 39–47. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-4560.1986.
tb00868.x.
Lewin, M. (1992). The impact of Kurt Lewin’s life on the place of social issues in his work.
Journal of Social Issues, 48(2), 15–29. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-4560.1992.tb00880.x.
Lewin, K. (1997a). Problems of research in social psychology. In Resolving social conflicts: Field
theory in social science, Originally published as “Constructs in Psychology and Psychological
Ecology,” University of Iowa Studies in Child Welfare, 1944, 20:23-27; reprinted as “Problems
of Research in Social Psychology,” in Dorwin Cartwright, ed., Field Theory in Social Science:
Selected Theoretical Papers (New York: Harper and Row, 1951), pp. 155-169 (pp. 279–288).
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Lewin, K. (1997b). When Facing Danger. In Resolving social conflicts: Field theory in social sci-
ence, originally published in Jewish Frontier, 1939 (pp. 116–121). Washington, DC: American
Psychological Association.
Lewin, K. (1999). Cassirer’s Philosophy of Science and the Social Sciences. In M. Gold (Ed.),
The complete social scientist: A Kurt Lewin Reader (pp. 23–36). Washington, DC: American
Psychological Association (APA).
Lewin, K., & Korsch, K. (1939). Mathematical constructs in psychology and sociology. Erkenntnis,
8(1), 397–403. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00176045.
Lewin, K., & Rupp, H. (1928a). Untersuchungen zur Textilindustrie I. Psychotechnische Zeitschrift,
3(1), 8–63.
Lewin, K., & Rupp, H. (1928b). Untersuchungen zur Textilindustrie II. Psychotechnische
Zeitschrift, 3(2), 51–63.
Lewin, K., Lippitt, R., & White, R. K. (1939). Patterns of aggressive behavior in experimentally
created “social climates”. The Journal of Social Psychology, 10, 271–299.
Lippitt, R. (1940). An experimental study of the effect of democratic and authoritarian group atmo-
spheres. University of Iowa Studies in Child Welfare, 16(3), 7–42.
60 M. Dege
Manolis Dafermos
Introduction
M. Dafermos (*)
Department of Psychology, University of Crete, Rethymnon, Greece
e-mail: mdafermo@uoc.gr
Vygotsky’s project has rightly been characterized as “the first attempt in psychol-
ogy and education to apply the principles of Marxist dialectics in developing theory
of human development and learning” (Stetsenko 2010: 70). Materialist dialectics
was employed by Vygotsky as a way to overcome the crisis in psychology that was
internally connected with the dominant conceptualization of generalization in the
domain of psychology. For Vygotsky, the crisis in psychology is related to the ten-
dency of the main trends in the field of psychology toward generalization. The rep-
resentatives of various trends of psychology such as Gestalt, psychoanalysis, and
reflexology go beyond their boundaries and transfer their concepts to adjacent
fields. Particular concepts, ideas, or discoveries from the particular fields and sub-
disciplines of psychology tend to become universal postulates for the explanation of
the totality of psychological phenomena. Vygotsky focused his attention on the ten-
dency for the extrapolation of particular ideas beyond the proper boundaries into the
broader realm of knowledge. This tendency demonstrates the real need to develop a
kind of generalization in the domain of psychology and the failure of the current
approaches to offer a solution to this problem. Vygotsky found a link between the
tendency toward unification and generalization in a discipline. Moreover, the failure
to solve the problem of unification and generalization is examined by Vygotsky as
an objective and necessary illusion, instead of attributing it to the personal mistake
of the scientists involved. The failure to solve the problem of unification and gener-
alization through the extrapolation of concepts and ideas beyond their boundaries is
similar to the transcendental illusions of pure Reason that were analyzed by Kant.
Transcendental illusions inevitably emerge when Reason attempts to apply concepts
beyond all possible experience.
Vygotsky discussed critically Neokantian conceptualization of psychology. He
agreed with Binswanger’s idea that general science is “a theory of ultimate founda-
tion, of the general principles and problems of a given area of knowledge” (Vygotsky
1997a: 247) from special disciplines (sub-disciplines). However, he challenged
Binswanger’s examination of general science as a part of the logic that studies vari-
ous logical forms in different disciplines. More generally, Vygotsky called into
question Kantian and Neokantian “critique of psychology” and any kind of a priori
formalistic construction of a system of concepts of scientific knowledge: “We pro-
ceed by induction-we generalize enormous groups of facts, compare them, analyze
and create new abstractions” (Vygotsky 1997a: 252). However, for Vygotsky, scien-
tific research is not reduced to a simple observation and description of empirical
data. Scientific knowledge goes beyond the boundaries of sensuous experience.
Scientific work “isolates, analyzes, separates, abstracts a single feature” (Vygotsky
1997a: 274).
In the first stages of their development, concrete disciplines move from the sen-
suous concrete to the abstract by using methods such as the analysis of phenomena
into their elements and inductive generalization. The absolutization of the move-
ment from the sensuous concrete to the abstract leads to the “cult of empiricism” in
64 M. Dafermos
mainstream North American psychology (Toulmin and Leary 1985). The attempt to
avoid philosophical theory and the concomitant faith in empirical data and the
“facts” themselves is one of the expressions of the “cult of empiricism.” As part of
the movement of thinking from the sensuous concrete to the abstract in the domain
of psychology a set of quantitative procedures and technical tools has been employed
as a means to establish universality of psychological knowledge.
Vygotsky found not only the Kantian a priori construction of a system of scien-
tific concepts problematic but also the empiricist account of science as a linear accu-
mulation of pure empirical facts. Vygotsky accepted Goethe’s idea that every fact
becomes fact within a particular theory: “Everything described as a fact is already a
theory” (Vygotsky 1997a: 249). The strict opposition between the description of
facts and the articulation of theoretical concepts reproduces a dualism in the process
of knowledge construction. More generally, Vygotsky challenged the reproduction
of an unbridgeable gap between concepts and objects as well as the separation of the
conceptual system of psychology from its historical development as a discipline.
Moreover, in contrast to the examination of methodology as a homogeneous cor-
pus of technical instruments, Vygotsky stated that there is not a general methodol-
ogy of psychology, but a struggle between “deeply hostile, mutually exclusive,
methodological principles” (Vygotsky 1997a: 261). For Vygotsky, a general theory
or a general methodology cannot be established through an eclectic combination of
elements from different theories and methodologies. Challenging eclecticism,
Vygotsky proposed the development of “the dialectic of psychology – this is what
we may now call the general psychology” (Vygotsky 1997a: 256). The need for the
re-foundation of psychology as a discipline stems first and foremost from the soci-
etal practice. Bridging the gap between theory and societal practice is one of the
most important challenges from the perspective of dialectics. “The dialectic unity of
methodology and practice” (Vygotsky 1997a: 310) was presented by Vygotsky as a
way to develop a new conceptualization of generalization. Developing a monistic,
dialectic system of psychological concepts on the basis of new societal and profes-
sional practice was crucial for Vygotsky. It was argued that a system of concepts of
psychology should be built, as Marx established the system of concepts of political
economy. “Psychology is in need of its own Das Kapital” (Vygotsky 1997a: 330).
But for building the system of concepts of psychology, it is necessary to find its
“cell,” its starting point. In contrast to analysis into elements, Vygotsky proposed
promoting an analysis into units that reveals the smallest part of a complex whole
with all its essential properties. The unit of analysis serves as a starting point for the
theoretical reconstruction of a complex whole as a developing process. Vygotsky’s
idea on “cell” and “units of analysis” constitutes an important contribution to the
understanding of generalization in the domain of psychology. The “cell” and “units
of analysis” fit the investigation of self-organizing, changing, developing systems,
rather than mechanical systems. Vygotsky employed these concepts in order to
develop a dialectical, holistic, historical approach to consciousness (Dafermos 2018).
In his manuscript “The historical sense of psychological crisis,” Vygotsky sup-
posed that “the mechanism of reaction” (Vygotsky 1997a: 320) is the “cell” of
psychology as a science. In the subsequent stages of his creative development,
4 Developing a Dialectical Understanding of Generalization: An Unfinalized Dialogue… 65
Vygotsky proposed other definitions of the “unit of analysis” (or “cell”) (Vygotsky
1987: 46), “instrumental act” (Vygotsky 1997b), “meaning” (Vygotsky 1987: 244),
“perezhivanie”1 (Vygotsky 1994). It seems that Vygotsky was not satisfied by his
own proposals of the “cell’” and “units of analysis” (Veresov 1999; Dafermos
2014). The issue of theoretical generalization was posed by Vygotsky, but it
remained unsolved. Generalization was examined by Vygotsky in the context of his
investigation of concept formation by using the method of double stimulation2 from
a developmental perspective. Vygotsky distinguished different types of generaliza-
tion in the process of concept development. During the syncretic stage, children
collect objects together in accordance with their subjective impressions, without
understanding the objective relations between the objects themselves. Complexive
thinking was examined by Vygotsky as a crucial stage of concept development.
Children become able to define both subjective and objective connections that actu-
ally exist among the objects that are involved in a practical operation. “The complex-
collection is a generalization based on their co-participation in a single practical
operation, a generalization of things based on their functional collaboration”
(Vygotsky 1987: 139).
Conceptual thinking is based on the ability to generalize on the basis of essential
relations between objects. It consists of the development of an ability to reveal the
complex hierarchical relations between things, the relations between the general
and the particular: “the process of concept formation came to be understood as a
complex process involving the movement of thinking through the pyramid of con-
cepts, a process involving constant movement from the general to the particular and
from the particular to the general” (Vygotsky 1987: 162).
For Vygotsky, concept development is connected with the formation of the
child’s ability to generalize. The development of generalization is internally con-
nected with the transition from the sensuous concrete to abstract thinking in the
process of resolving concrete problems. The main limitation of Vygotsky’s investi-
gation of concept formation on the basis of the method of double stimulation was
connected with his focus on artificial concepts and the lack of attention on the word
meaning. From the investigation of artificial concepts on the basis of the method of
double stimulation, Vygotsky moved toward an inquiry into real-life concepts.
Vygotsky investigated the interconnection between everyday and scientific con-
cepts on the basis of a critical reflection of Piaget’s theory of cognitive development.
1
The Russian word “perezhivanie” refers to living through experience and working through it. The
concept of perezhivanie was used by Vygotsky as a part of the system of concepts of cultural-his-
torical theory. This concept expresses the dialectical, dynamic relation between personality, and
the social environment which is part and parcel of personality development (Dafermos 2018). “In
an emotional experience [perezhivanie] we are always dealing with an indivisible unity of personal
characteristics and situational characteristics, which are represented in the emotional experience
[perezhivanie]” (Vygotsky 1994: 342).
2
L. Sakharov and L. Vygotsky developed the method of double stimulation for the study of the
development of higher functions with the help of two types of stimuli: simple stimuli that cause a
direct response and auxiliary means that help the subject to organize his behavior (Vygotsky 1987;
Zavershneva and Van der Veer 2018).
66 M. Dafermos
Everyday concepts are acquired by children in their everyday life, while scientific
concepts are formed in the context of the systematic school instruction. Everyday
concepts develop from “bottom to top,” from everyday experience to generaliza-
tions, while scientific concepts from “top to bottom,” from verbal explanations to
children’s everyday experience. “Concepts are distributed between poles ranging
from an immediate, sensual, graphic grasping of the object to the ultimate general-
ization (i.e., the most abstract concept)” (Vygotsky 1987: 226).
Concept development was examined by Vygotsky as a transition from a con-
crete, immediate sensory grasp of an object to the abstract thinking based on maxi-
mally generalized conceptualization. Braun (1991) notes that Vygotsky associated
the concrete thought with factually based mental complexes and the abstract thought
with the articulation of logical concepts. The identification of the concrete with
sensuous perception and the abstract with a maximally generalized conceptualiza-
tion in Vygotsky’s writings demonstrates that despite Vygotsky’s attempt to develop
a dialectical account of human development, he could not avoid the influence of the
Lockean empiricist tradition on his research on concept development.
At the last stage of the elaboration of his book Thinking and Speech Vygotsky
took an important step toward overcoming the intellectualistic understanding of
concept formation. For Vygotsky, thinking as a higher mental function reflects real-
ity “in a generalized way” (Vygotsky 1997a: 48–49). For Vygotsky, every word
contains a kind of generalization. The generalized function of a word is connected
with its meaning. “From a psychological perspective, word meaning is first and
foremost a generalization” (Vygotsky 1997a: 47). Meaning was examined by
Vygotsky as a unit of analysis of consciousness. The elaboration of the concept of
unit of analysis can be examined as an attempt to go beyond empirical, inductive
generalization and develop a theoretical generalization.
Empirical generalization is a kind of inference based on identifying external
similarities between different properties or parts of an object. For example, a phe-
notypical, formal analysis of the external characteristics of the whale leads to the
conclusion that it is a fish. A theoretical generalization is an act of thinking that
reflects the internal relations of an object as a whole, its dynamics of development.
Based on a theoretical generalization, comparative and evolutionary biology offers
evidence that the whale is a marine mammal.
Vygotsky’s understanding of the word as a kind of generalization was formed
under the influence of his reading of Lenin’s Philosophical Notebook. Lenin articu-
lated the idea that “every word already universalizes” (Zavershneva and Van der
Veer 2018: 136). According to Vygotsky, Lenin examined the rational core of ideal-
ism which connected the freedom that every concept offers. “In the simplest gener-
alization, in the most elementary general idea, there is a certain bit of fantasy =
freedom. In the concept, there is freedom” (Zavershneva and Van der Veer 2018:
134). This bit of fantasy offers the freedom from the thing. The danger of idealism
consists in turning concepts into isolated, separated beings. The dialectical under-
standing of generalization reflects the twofold movement of thinking “toward the
real thing and away from it” (Zavershneva and Van der Veer 2018: 134).
4 Developing a Dialectical Understanding of Generalization: An Unfinalized Dialogue… 67
The issue of generalization arose in the context of discussions on activity theory and
its relation to Vygotsky’s cultural-historical theory. One of the most important con-
tributions to the investigation of the issue of generalization was associated with the
eminent adherent of activity theory, Vasily Davydov. He was involved in a debate
about the possibilities of the creation of a system of psychological concepts on the
basis of the concept of activity.
68 M. Dafermos
From the previous analysis, we see that both Lev Vygotsky and Vasily Davydov
attempted to overcome the crisis of traditional psychology based on formal general-
izations and develop a dialectical account of human development in its complexity.
They were inspired by dialectics as a way of thinking and attempted to build a
monistic theory in the domain of psychology. Developing a monistic account of
human development was a way to go beyond Cartesian dualism that still dominates
psychology.
Moreover, in the quest for a “dialectical synthesis,” both Vygotsky and Davydov
posed the problem of the concrete universal in the field of psychology, but they
resolved it in different ways. There are essential differences between Vygotsky and
Davydov in understanding of the relation between empirical and theoretical gener-
alization as well as the interaction between everyday and scientific concepts.
4 Developing a Dialectical Understanding of Generalization: An Unfinalized Dialogue… 71
They were involved in the search for the theoretical generalization that can
become the fundament of the construction of a new psychological theory. Both
Vygotsky and Davydov articulated this crucial question, but they attempted to solve
it in different ways. In contrast to the dominant tendency in psychology for a reduc-
tionist analysis into elements, Vygotsky proposed “units of analysis.” He was look-
ing for a way of investigating the complex configuration of human subjectivity. For
Davydov, the concept of activity can serve as the “germ cell” for the building of a
system of psychological concepts. Vygotsky’s search for “units of analysis” and
Davydov’s emphasis on theoretical generalization can be examined as different
ways of formulating the problem of concrete universal in the field of psychology.
Inspired by Davydov’s concept of generalization, Tolman argue that “…the crisis in
general psychology is such that it can only be resolved by resorting to an alternate
form of generalization that leads to concrete theoretical knowledge rather than
abstract generalities” (Tolman 1989: 207). This type of universality that became the
dominant way of thinking in psychology was labeled by Hegel as “abstract”:
The activity of the understanding consists generally in the bestowing of the form of univer-
sality on its content; and the universal posited by the understanding is, of course, an abstract
one, which is held onto in firm opposition to the particular. (Hegel 1991: 126)
3
There is a fundamental difference between essentialism and the dialectical conceptualization of
the relation between essence and phenomena. Essentialism is a metaphysical conceptualization of
generalization based on the examination of specific properties of an object as stable, universal, and
4 Developing a Dialectical Understanding of Generalization: An Unfinalized Dialogue… 73
not dependent on the concrete context. From a dialectical perspective, essence is examined as a
system of contradictory, dynamic, historical relations of a concrete, developing object, rather than
an abstract, formal set of deconceptualized attributes. Moving from a purely descriptive, empirical
study of phenomena to investigate their internal essence was a crucial issue for Vygotsky. “In
theory, the internal essence of things and the external form of their manifestation do not coincide.
“If the form of manifestation and the essence of things coincided directly, then all science would
be superfluous”” (Vygotsky 1998: 188–189).
74 M. Dafermos
Addressing the issue of the contribution of different forms of practice (in home,
school, community, work, etc.) to concept formation, the theory of situated learning
promises a broader perspective for research of generalization. The community of
practice framework has been proposed by the adherents of situated learning as a
way to go beyond the abstract and decontextualized models of generating by focus-
ing on the subjective and intersubjective dimensions of human life (Rogoff and
Lave 1984; Henning 2004). Situated learning became one the most important ways
to fill a real gap in understanding the relation between everyday and scientific con-
cepts and offer a contextual, relational, and intersubjective understanding of learn-
ing. The question arises whether the knowledge that has been acquired in everyday
situations in particular contexts and domains can be generalized. It is important also
to clarify what kind of generalization it is and how it is associated with other forms
of generalization.
The issue of the relation between formal and situated generalization provokes
tension and controversy. Nemirovsky argues that “adherents of the situated cogni-
tion perspective are at ease with the pervasive evidence that local circumstances,
ongoing goals, and tools at hand, shape human thinking and action, while, on the
other hand, generalizing and abstraction appear difficult to account for” (Nemirovsky
2002: 234). Calling into question formal generalization, the situated cognition per-
spective brings to light the complexity of cognition and learning in particular
domains and contexts. Clancey argues that “the theory of situated learning claims
that every idea and human action is a generalization, adapted to the ongoing envi-
ronment” (1995: 49). The particularistic emphasis implicit in the theory of situated
learning is an understandable reaction against universalism of cognitivism
(Bredo 1997).
The focus on situated cognition has been developed—to a significant extent—
under the influence of the postmodern criticism of the modern pursuit of universal-
ity that “leads to the repression of particularity” (Susen 2015: 46). Particularism as
a way of thinking is close to the postmodern glorification of difference and diversity.
However, the postmodern celebration of particularity and differences risks asserting
them as a new “universal” (or an “new absolute”). It is easy to jump from one
extreme to another and difficult to grasp the dialectical interconnection between the
general and the particular. The reduction of the general to the particular is no less
one-dimensional than the Hegelian approach to subsume the particular under the
universal. More generally, I argue that universalism and particularism mutually
reinforce each other, and they can be examined as two sides of the same coin. From
my perspective, the creative potential of the concrete, situated ways of knowing can
be tapped only in its dialectical interconnection with the general forms of cognition
in terms of a dialectical synthesis.
The dialectical way of thinking offers the opportunity to go beyond the tension
between empirical and abstract generalization and highlight the spiral-like
4 Developing a Dialectical Understanding of Generalization: An Unfinalized Dialogue… 75
d evelopment of knowledge that includes both the movements of thinking from the
concrete to the abstract and from the abstract to the concrete (Vaziulin 1985). By
employing this dialectical, double movement of thinking (the movements of think-
ing from the sensuous concrete to the abstract and from the abstract to the concrete),
the subjects become aware of the complexity of the real world and are actively
involved in societal practice. From a dialectical perspective, generalization emerges
as a creative, reflective act (see Tateo 2013) with a complex configuration.
Revealing the shortcomings of abstract, formal generalization that remains dom-
inant in positivist-oriented psychology, both Vygotsky and Davydov proposed to
develop a dialectical approach to generalization. The disagreements between them
on the ways of the development of a dialectical approach to generalization demon-
strate the complexity of this issue and the real need to examine it concretely and
historically. The relation between the general and the particular is not static, but it
changes dynamically in the process of the historical development of society and
science. The dialectical way of thinking brings to light the historicity of the con-
cepts “general” and “particular” and the transformations of their interrelations
(included their meanings) in the social history and the history of science. Moreover,
the dialectical way of thinking offers the opportunity to address the issue of gener-
alization not only on the domain of actually existing societal forms, but also antici-
pate potential future societal development.
The understanding of the dynamic, historical relation between the general and
the particular as well as the spiral-like development of knowledge as a contradictory
unity of both movements of thinking from the sensuous concrete to the abstract and
from the abstract to the concrete are essential in order to develop a dialectical grasp
of the relationship between theory and societal practice. Challenging the traditional
theory–practice dichotomy that remains dominant in psychology, Holzkamp argued
that “the comprehensive meaning of the reason-guided reflection and generalization
of human issues is not merely to be reconstructed in practice but also in theory …
And only then can the self-evident insight become effective that, just as theory
remains irrelevant without practice, practice is inevitably blind without a ‘theoreti-
cal public’” (Holzkamp 2013: 110–111). Moving beyond the theory–practice
dichotomy, the dialectical way of thinking reflects the historical relation between
the general and the particular in order to promote active, transformative
subjectivity.
References
Baumann, C. (2011). Adorno, Hegel and the concrete universal. Philosophy and Social Criticism,
37(1), 73–94.
Blakeley, T. (1964). Soviet theory of knowledge. Dordrecht: Springer Science+Business Media.
Braun, C. M. J. (1991). The Marxist categories of the ‘abstract’ and ‘concrete’ and the cultural-
historical school of psychology. Multidisciplinary Newsletter for Activity Theory, 4, 36–41.
Bredo, E. (1997). The social construction of learning. In G. Phye (Ed.), Handbook of academic
learning: The construction of knowledge (pp. 3–43). New York: Academic Press.
76 M. Dafermos
Nemirovsky, R. (2002). On Guessing the essential thing. In K. P. Gravemeijer, R. Lehrer, H. J. van
Oers, & L. Verschaffel (Eds.), Symbolizing, modeling and tool use in mathematics education
(pp. 233–256). Dordrecht: Springer–Science +Business media.
Nissen, M. (2012). The subjectivity of participation. Articulating social work practice with youth
in Copenhagen. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Pavlidis, P. (2010). Critical thinking as dialectics: A Hegelian-Marxist approach. The Journal of
Critical Education Policy Studies, 8(2), 74–102.
Popper, K. (1940). What is dialectic? Mind, 49(196), 403–426.
Rogoff, B., & Lave, J. (Eds.). (1984). Everyday cognition: Its development in social context
(pp. 9–40). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Stetsenko, A. (2010). Standing on the shoulders of giants: A balancing act of dialectically theo-
rizing conceptual understanding on the grounds of Vygotsky’s project. In W.-M. Roth (Ed.),
Re/structuring science education: ReUniting psychological and sociological perspectives
(pp. 53–72). New York: Springer.
Susen, S. (2015). The ‘postmodern turn’ in the social sciences. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Tateo, L. (2013). Generalization as creative and reflective act: Revisiting Lewin’s conflict between
Aristotelian and Galilean modes of thought in psychology. Theory & Psychology, 23(4),
518–536.
Tateo, L. (2015). The nature of generalization in psychology. In S. Salvatore, G. Marsico, & R. A.
Ruggeri (Eds.), Reflexivity and psychology (pp. 45–64). Charlotte, NC: Information Age.
Tolman, C. (1989). The general psychological crisis and its comparative psychological resolution.
International Journal of Comparative Psychology, 2(3), 197–207.
Toulmin, S. (1982). The genealogy of ‘consciousness’. In P. F. Secord (Ed.), Explaining human
behavior: Consciousness, human action, and social structure (pp. 53–70). Beverly Hills, CA:
Sage.
Toulmin, S., & Leary, D. E. (1985). The cult of empiricism in psychology, and beyond. In
S. Koch & D. E. Leary (Eds.), A century of psychology as science (pp. 594–617). New York:
McGraw-Hill.
Valsiner, J. (2015). The place for synthesis: Vygotsky’s analysis of affective generalization. History
of the Human Sciences, 28(2), 93–102.
Vaziulin, V. A. (1985). Rassudocnoe i razumnoe myslenije v razvitii poznanija [Understanding
and reason in the development of cognition]. In M. N. Alekseev, & A. M. Korshunov (Eds.),
Dialektika protsessa poznanija [Dialectics of the cognitive process]. Moscow: MGU.
Vaziulin, V. A. (2002). Logika ‘Kapitala’ Karla Marksa [The logic of K. Marx’s “capital”].
Moscow: Sovremennij Gumanitarnij Universitet.
Veresov, N. (1999). Undiscovered Vygotsky. Frankfurt/M.: Peter Lang.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1987). Thinking and speech. In R. W. Rieber & A. S. Carton (Eds.), The collected
works of L. S. Vygotsky: Problems of general psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 39–285). New York:
Plenum Press.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1994). The problem of the environment. In R. Van der Veer & J. Valsiner (Eds.),
The Vygotsky reader (pp. 338–354). Oxford: Blackwell.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1997a). The historical meaning of the crisis of psychology. In R. Rieber &
J. Wolloc (Eds.), The collected works of L.S. Vygotsky (Vol. 3, pp. 233–344). New York:
Plenum Press.
Vygotsky, L. (1997b). The instrumental method in psychology. In R. Rieber & J. Wolloc (Eds.),
The collected works of L.S. Vygotsky (Vol. 3, pp. 85–89). New York: Plenum Press.
Vygotsky, L. (1998). The problem of age. In R. Rieber (Ed.), The collected works of L. S. Vygotsky
(Vol. 5, pp. 187–205). New York: Plenum Press.
Willy, R. (1897). Die Krisis in der Psychologie (first and second article). Vierteljahrsschrift für
wissenschaftliche Philosophie, 21(79–96), 227–353.
Willy, R. (1899). Die Krisis in der Psychologie. Leipzig: Reisland.
Zavershneva, E., & Van der Veer, R. (2018). Vygotsky’s notebooks: A selection. Singapore:
Springer.
Chapter 5
Generalization in Science: Abstracting
from Unique Events
Jaan Valsiner
1
Astrophysics is a developmental science of objects (galaxies, neutron stars, “black holes,” etc.)
that emerge, develop, and extinguish. They do not belong to the category of living systems but are
examples of open systems in the existence of the universe. They exist in temporarily equilibrated
states of dynamic stability, transforming from one form into another. All these qualitative transi-
tions are unique events of irreversible kind. Completely new and difficult to classify new phenom-
ena are observed—such as Oumuamua (the first interstellar object traveling from constellation of
Lyra toward Pegasus, discovered on October 19, 2017). The return of such interstellar objects is
not expected. Likewise the emergence of “black holes” from the collapse of neutron stars is a short
one-time event of no recurrence (producing gravitational waves—https://www.ligo.caltech.edu/
page/what-are-gw)
J. Valsiner (*)
Department of Communication and Psychology, Aalborg University, Aalborg, Denmark
The reality of the single instances within single cases brings two areas of work
within psychology—clinical, educational, and organizational practices on the one
hand, and basic science on the other. The advancement of idiographic science
(Molenaar 2004; Salvatore et al. 2009, 2010a, b, 2012, 2014; Salvatore and Valsiner
2010) indicates the move of basic science away from the statistical mindset of large
sample research to the focus on the real individual cases. The focus on such cases is
a given reality for all applied areas—a clinical treatment of a patient, a consultation
of a business firm, or advice to a government about the impacts of introducing a new
legislation are all single cases where the general understanding of the principles of
their organization is crucial. This leads us to the question of our axiomatic setup of
how we conceptualize the structure of the single case (event).
There are three possible ways how to axiomatically conceptualize a single case
(Fig. 5.1), The three ways have dramatic implications for science.
5 Generalization in Science: Abstracting from Unique Events 81
The act of generalization includes selective abstraction of some features of the con-
crete phenomenon. In a classic summary of the idea on the border of the nineteenth
and twentieth centuries, the notion of generalization was described in conjunction
with abstraction:
All generalization involves abstraction; to generalize is to recognize likeness which had
been previously masked by differences; to recognize the likeness is also therefore to recog-
nize these differences as irrelevant, and to disregard them from the point of view of the
general conception. Such recognition is abstraction (Stout and Baldwin 1901a: 408, added
emphases)
In the generalization process, differences are detected—but they are not maintained.
What these differences allow us to do is to find unity that transcends these differ-
ences. This is done by abstraction. Abstraction includes selection and distancing.
The latter leads to the act of dismissal:
…abstraction occurs only when the interest of thought lies in following out of its relations,
not within, but outside this context. To this end its relations within the given context must
be as far as possible ignored; and when they obtrude themselves, they must be recognized as
irrelevant, and for that reason disregarded. (Stout and Baldwin 1901b: 8, added emphases)
5 Generalization in Science: Abstracting from Unique Events 83
The act of negation is central for our cognitive processes. It entails resistance to the
imposition of the here-and-now settings (Valsiner 2017a) which makes it in princi-
ple possible to “go beyond the information given”—which is—to think. The func-
tion of negation
…appears in refusal, prohibition, imperatives, and wishes. Without negation no sphere of
human activity could reach the stage of decision and determination or overcome the stage
of chaos and indecision and enter the stage of order and cosmos. Without negation no cre-
ation of the human mind (like science, philosophy, art, or religion) could reach unity of
meaning. (Heinemann 1943-1944: 137)
What is negated in this First Negation is the similarity of A and B. An example is
simple. Psychologists like to demonstrate gender differences between samples of
males and females in almost any “measure” they ever invent. Once a statistically
significant difference is found between averages of sample A (men) and of sample
B (women) then through the rules of inductive generalization they claim that men
are different from women and vice versa. This generalization entails a trick of
abstractive homogenization of the samples (Valsiner 1986)—in the empirical phase
of research the heterogeneous nature of the samples is accepted (and used for statis-
tical analysis). Once the resulting significant difference is obtained, the heterogene-
ity of the sample is left behind and substituted by the assumption of homogeneity
(all A are A and all B are B: all women are similar to one another as women and all
men to one another as men). Most of psychology’s generalizations end at this stage
of abstraction.
Double negation makes generalization possible. The Second Negation in the tra-
dition of dialectical philosophy—not utilized widely in psychology—entails the
negation of the relevance of the First Negation:
IF WE FIND A TO BE DIFFERENT FROM B (empirically)
then it is true that
A IS NOT B AND B IS NOT A (logically)
But
THE FOUND DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A AND B DOES NOT MATTER
since we assume that the compared phenomena have some basic aspects in common that
MAKE THE FIRST COMPARISON POSSIBLE
It is notable that the comparison of males and females happens within the whole of
the given species (human) rather than across species. No psychologist would prob-
ably take seriously a suggestion that a sample of army ants be compared with a
sample of males recruited into an army to find out their differences in “aggressivity.”
Such comparison makes no sense—while that of men with women does. But why
does it? Men and women are parts of the same whole (humans) differentiated into
two complementary subforms that are necessary for the survival of the whole (spe-
cies) and of the sub-wholes (family units that guarantee reproduction)—thus sur-
vival of the species. As long as higher biological species have left the reproductive
tactics of parthenogenesis behind, the difference between men and women hides
their basic compatibility. That can be seen in androgyny—the unity of male and
female characteristics within each and every man and woman.
The question that presents itself at this junction is—why do psychologists docu-
ment between-samples empirical differences at all, if these in the end do not matter?
The takeover of the “empire of chance” (Gigerenzer et al. 1989) in the domain of
psychology’s methodology, together with the underdevelopment of the theoretically
productive abstractive languages (in contrast with chemistry—Valsiner 2012) has
5 Generalization in Science: Abstracting from Unique Events 85
led psychology into a state where the empirical accumulation of data grows expo-
nentially while the generalizing theoretical systems have only slowly advanced
(Toomela and Valsiner 2010). Psychology today is similar to a powerful engine that
is working at full strength in accumulating empirical evidence but failing to arrive
at generalized basic knowledge of the psyche.
Where Is the Problem?
The problem for psychology today is similar to that of chemistry from the eigh-
teenth to nineteenth centuries—the mismatch between the wholistic nature of the
phenomena on the one hand, and the elementaristic analytic conceptual instru-
ments to make sense of the complexity, on the other. In the human case, this is
further complicated by the inherent intentionalities encoded into complex phenom-
ena. This limitation goes beyond the parallel with chemistry—while complex
chemical compounds may relate with others in complex ways, none of these rela-
tions can be claimed to have any trace of intentionality. It would be absurd to claim
that the intention of water is to put out fire upon which it is thrown, but it is per-
fectly reasonable to assume that the fire fighter who wants to put out a fire inten-
tionally throws water on it. Human conduct is structured and intentional—both of
these features are forgotten in psychology over the past century. Two forgotten
directions of thought are waiting to be reintroduced in our contemporary psychol-
ogy. First, Franz Brentano’s philosophy of intentional nature of objects combined
with William MacDougall’s “hormic psychology” if developed further from their
starting efforts and turned into methodologically solid (i.e., qualitative) analytic
schemes would overcome the basic “error of the measurement orientation”2 that
has plagued psychology since the 1950s. Secondly, the pioneering efforts of
Ganzeitspsychologie in the 1910s–1930s can be revisited for innovation. The
Ganzheitsychologie tradition (Krueger 1915; Diriwächter 2008) maintains the pri-
macy of the whole—fluid, semi-structured, or well-structured (such as in case of
Gestalt psychology) over its parts—thus fitting with the nature of the complexity of
psychological phenomena.
2
What I refer to here is not “measurement error” but the error of the whole task of measurement in
psychology. As Joel Michell (1999) has demonstrated, it is from the 1950s onward that psychology
has canonized the notion of measurement as a task of “assigning numbers” to psychological phe-
nomena and subsequently considering the results of such assignments as representing real psycho-
logical characteristics that causally influence one another within the objects thus “measured.” This
act is a projective construction of consensually accepted non-reality as if it can explain the reality
of psychological functions.
86 J. Valsiner
Structures of Ganzheit
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cloud#Formation_and_distribution
3
5 Generalization in Science: Abstracting from Unique Events 87
Differently from clouds, embryos develop into an expected adult form of the
given species. While this process of development happens without any intentional-
ity of psychological kind (no embryo is expected to “want to grow into adult form”),
it poses theoretical problems connected with the necessity to consider anticipation
of the species-specific final form in embryonic development (e.g., Hans Driesch’s
efforts—Valsiner 2017b). The theoretical dilemma is profound—in our scientific
model making we are reluctant to operate with notions of expected futures (and if
we need to do so—we resort to one or another notion of probability). At the same
time, the reality of biological organisms transforming from embryonic states to
adult forms happens across generations with remarkable consistency and living up
to the principle of equifinality. The plan for movement into the adult form needs to
be guaranteed by the biological developing organism as of now—but the form of the
plan is for the future. This would call for some version of pre-formist hypothesis
(e.g., that of genetic determinacy of the adult forms) but at the same time it is pre-
cisely the epigenetic perspective that informs contemporary genetics (Lux and
Richter 2014) that renders such pre-formist hypothesis untenable. In the middle of
epigenetic variability and the open systemic modulation of exchange relations with
the environment the developing organisms still manage to grow up into a recogniz-
able adult form of the given species.
How is that continuity in the middle of variability amplification (Maruyama
1963, 1991) possible? In embryogenesis, answers are sought in the ways in which
the whole (geometry of the region) includes the various movement vectors for the
cells (Chardantseva and Cherdantsev 2006). If this is the case, the present wholistic
configuration of a field generates its own inherent “intentionality” for the ways in
which the system moves into a new state. The field is self-transforming—but not
goal-oriented (Fig. 5.3). In Fig. 5.3, a simple system of two units (A<>B) generates
such development vector in the interaction on their shared border (membrane)
where the new part C emerges.
Figure 5.3 is a hypothetical example of the central relevance of the periphery—of
the border of A and B where the oppositionally directed forces →← operate. This
follows the general notion of Gegenstand (Fig. 5.4.).
Gegenstand—something that stands against something else in literal expression,
it is the minimal wholistic structure in systems that include inherent intentional-
ity—in its minimum form this equals the presence of directionality vector in the
system—toward the border D. The vector toward D starts from an imaginary “start-
ing field” within which many other potential directions of vectors (all except the
actual one detected as oriented to D). This leads us to accepting the axiomatic deter-
mination that all psychological phenomena include inherent directionality once
they are formed (from the not-differentiated “starting field”). “I am striving towards
D but have not yet reached there” would be a personal translation of the abstract
scheme in Fig. 5.4. It also entails recognition of the movement in irreversible time—
from the past through the present (“I am moving towards D”) to the future.
The notion of Gegenstand as a theoretical term was widespread in philosophy
and psychology from eighteenth to early twentieth centuries, but together with the
monologization of psychologists’ focus onto elementary constituents (“behavior”)
88 J. Valsiner
structure yet different in personal meaning. Becoming 18 differs from becoming 80.
The psychographic depiction of the life course is that of unique events, while the
basic structure of the life course is formally similar across all persons. Similarly to
the generality of human anatomical universality across history of the species and
geographical distribution, it is in the area of psychological functions that similar
generality is expected. The only question is that about its abstract nature.
Stern’s depiction of psychography did not include time—the parameters in
Fig. 5.8 constitute a synchronic profile (of a single case, or in comparison with a
second or other cases in Komparationsforschung). This is a major limitation for any
perspective that recognizes development of the system under study to take place.
There can be synchronic profiles—representing the current cross section of the sys-
tem—but these profiles are undergoing change all the time in the case of each and
every compared individual (Molenaar et al. 2002).
The psychographic generalization needs to involve the study of various features
(Merkmale) in their systemic unity over time (Fig. 5.9).
Generalization under conditions of irreversible time necessarily involves relying
on the singular episodes observable in the look at the single case (Fig. 5.9). The first
observation—by definition an idiographic description—becomes nomothetic as
some features from it become generalized. These features are not about that single
case or about that episode itself, but about general principles that are analyzable in
this selected empirical model. Lev Vygotsky back in 1927 clarified the relevance of
the empirical work in physiology by Ivan Pavlov:
I.P. Pavlov practically studies the activity of the salivary gland of the dog. What gives him
the right to call his study that of the higher nervous activity of animals? Maybe he should
test his experiments on a horse, a crow, etc.—on all, or at least on the majority of animal
5 Generalization in Science: Abstracting from Unique Events 93
species, so as to make his conclusions? Or, maybe he should label his study like this:
investigation of salivation in the dog? But Pavlov did not study actually the salivation of a
dog as such. His research does not add anything to our knowledge of the dog as such or
salivation as such. In his studies of the dog he studied not the dog, but the animal in gen-
eral, in salivation – the reflex in general, i.e. in the study of this animal and in that phenom-
enon he emphasized that what was common with all similar phenomena. That is why his
conclusions not only relate to all animals but to all biology: the fact of salivation in the
case of Pavlovian dogs to Pavlov’s signals become directly into a general biological prin-
ciple—transformation of the inherited experience into that of the animal. (Vygotsky
1982/1927: 404)
William and Clara Stern, David and Rosa Katz, and Jean Piaget—comes from the
observations of single episodes of conduct of children under the conditions of life-
time longitudinal investigation.
Acknowledgments The editorial suggestions by Charlotte Højholt and Ernst Schraube were
helpful in fine tuning this chapter. I am grateful to Danske Grundforskningfond for 5 years of sup-
port to my work in 2013–2018 under the Niels Bohr Professorship scheme.
References
Branco, A. U., & Valsiner, J. (1997). Changing methodologies: A co-constructivist study of goal
orientations in social interactions. Psychology and Developing Societies, 9(1), 35–64.
Bühler, K. (1934/1965). Sprachtheorie. Stuttgart: Fischer.
Chardantseva, E., & Cherdantsev, V. (2006). Geometry of mechanics of teleost gastrulation and
the formation of primary embryonic axes. International Journal of Developmental Biology,
50, 157–168.
96 J. Valsiner
Chaudhary, N., Hviid, P., Marsico, G., & Villadsen, J. Q. (Eds.). (2016). Resistance in everyday
life: Constructing cultural experiences. Singapore: Springer Nature.
Cherdantsev, V. (2006). The dynamic geometry of mass cell movements in animal morphogenesis.
International Journal of Developmental Biology, 50, 169–182.
Diriwächter, R. (2008). Genetic Ganzheitspsychologie. In R. Diriwächter & J. Valsiner (Eds.),
Striving for the whole: Creating theoretical syntheses (pp. 21–45). New Brunswick, NJ:
Transaction.
Gigerenzer, G., Swijtink, Z., Porter, T., Daston, L., Beatty, J., & Krüger, L. (1989). The empire of
chance. Cambridge: Cambridge University Pres.
Gurwitsch, A. (1914). Der Vererbungsmechanismus der Form. Archiv für Entwicklungsmechanik
der Organismen, 39, 516–577.
Gurwitsch, A. (1922). Über den Begriff des Embryonalen Feldes. Archiv für Entwicklungsmechanik
der Organismen, 51, 383–413.
Gurwitsch, A. (1947). Une theorie du champ biologique cellulaire. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Hegel, G. F. W. (1802/1998). System der Sittlichkeit. In G. F. W. Hegel (Ed.), Gesammelte Werke.
Band 5. Hamburg: Felix Meiner Verlag.
Heinemann, F. H. (1943-1944). The meaning of negation. Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society,
44, 127–152.
Katona, G. (1940). Organizing and memorizing. New York: Columbia University Press.
Krueger, F. (1915). Über Entwicklungspsychologie, ihre sachliche und geschichtliche Notwendigkeit.
In: Arbeiten zur Entwicklungspsychologie, Band 1, Heft 1. Leipzig: Engelmann.
Lux, V., & Richter, J.-T. (Eds.). (2014). Kulturen der Epigenetik: Vererbt, codiert, übertragen.
Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.
Maruyama, M. (1963). The second cybernetics: Deviation-amplifying mutual causal processes.
American Scientist, 51, 164–179.
Maruyama, M. (1991). Epistemological heterogeneity and subsedure: Individual and social pro-
cesses. Communication and Cognition, 24(2), 255–272.
Michell, J. (1999). Measurement in psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Molenaar, P. C. M. (2004). A manifesto on psychology as idiographic science: Bringing the person
back into scientific psychology, this time forever. Measurement, 2(4), 201–218.
Molenaar, P. C. M., Huizinga, H. M., & Nesselroade, J. R. (2002). The relationship between the
structure of inter-individual and intra-individual variability. In U. Staudinger & U. Lindenberger
(Eds.), Understanding human development (pp. 339–360). Dordrecht: Klüwer.
Nedergaard, J. I., Valsiner, J., & Marsico, G. (2015). “I am not that kind of…”: Personal relat-
ing with social borders. In B. Wagoner, N. Chaudhary, & P. Hviid (Eds.), Integrating experi-
ences: Body and mind moving between contexts (pp. 245–263). Charlotte, NC: Information
Age Publishers.
Pizzarroso, N., & Valsiner, J. (2017). Why developmental psychology is not developmental? In
M. Raudsepp (Ed.), Jaan Valsiner: Between self and societies—Cultural psychology in a new
key (pp. 91–125). Tallinn: Tallinn University Press.
Salvatore, S., & Valsiner, J. (2010). Between the general and the unique: Overcoming the nomo-
thetic versus idiographic opposition. Theory & Psychology, 20(6), 817–833.
Salvatore, S., Valsiner, J., Strout-Yagodzinsky, S., & Clegg, J. (Eds.). (2009). YIS: Yearbook of
idiographic science 2008 (Vol. 1). Rome: Fireira Publishing.
Salvatore, S., Valsiner, J., Travers Simon, J., & Gennaro, A. (Eds.). (2010a). YIS-2: Yearbook of
idiographic science 2009. Roma: Fireira & Luzio.
Salvatore, S., Valsiner, J., Travers Simon, J., & Gennaro, A. (Eds.). (2010b). YIS-3: Yearbook of
Idiographic Science 2010. Roma: Fireira & Luzi.
Salvatore, S., Gennaro, A., & Valsiner, J. (Eds.). (2012). Making sense of infinite uniqueness. Vol. 4
of YIS: Yearbook of idiographic science. Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishers.
Salvatore, S., Gennaro, A., & Valsiner, J. (Eds.). (2014). Multicentric identities in a globaliz-
ing world. Vol. 5 of YIS: Yearbook of Idiographic Science. Charlotte, NC: Information Age
Publishers.
5 Generalization in Science: Abstracting from Unique Events 97
Sato, T. (Ed.). (2017). Collected papers on the trajectory equifinality approach. Tokyo: Chitose
Press.
Sato, T., Mori, N., & Valsiner, J. (Eds.). (2016). Making of the future: The trajectory Equifinality
approach in cultural psychology. Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishers.
Smedslund, J. (1995). Psychologic: Common sense and the pseudoempirical. In J. A. Smith,
R. Harré, & L. van Langenhove (Eds.), Rethinking psychology (pp. 196–206). London: Sage.
Stern, W. (1911/1994). Die Differenzielle Psychologie. Bern: Hans Huber.
Stout, G. F., & Baldwin, J. M. (1901a). Generalization. In J. M. Baldwin (Ed.), Dictionary of phi-
losophy and psychology (p. 408). New York: Macmillan.
Stout, G. F., & Baldwin, J. M. (1901b). Abstraction. In J. M. Baldwin (Ed.), Dictionary of philoso-
phy and psychology (p. 6). New York: Macmillan.
Toomela, A., & Valsiner, J. (Eds.). (2010). Methodological thinking in psychology: 60 years gone
astray? Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishers.
Vaihinger, H. (1935). The philosophy of ‘As if’. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner.
Valsiner, J. (1986). Between groups and individuals: Psychologists’ and laypersons’ interpreta-
tions of correlational findings. In J. Valsiner (Ed.), The individual subject and scientific psy-
chology (pp. 113–152). New York: Plenum.
Valsiner, J. (2000). Culture and human development. London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. (2012). Learning from the fate of psychology. In J. Valsiner (Ed.), A guided science:
History of psychology in the mirror of its making. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction.
Valsiner, J. (2015a). The place for synthesis: Vygotsky’s analysis of affective generalization.
History of the Human Sciences, 28(2), 93–102.
Valsiner, J. (2015b). Generalization is possible only from a single case (and from a single instance).
In B. Wagoner, N. Chaudhary, & P. Hviid (Eds.), Integrating experiences: Body and mind mov-
ing between contexts (pp. 233–244). Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishers.
Valsiner, J. (2016). The nomothetic function of the idiographic approach: Looking from inside out.
Journal of Person-Oriented Research, 2(1–2), 5–15. https://doi.org/10.17505/jpor:2016.02.
Valsiner, J. (2017a). From methodology to methods in human psychology. New York: Springer.
Valsiner, J. (2017b). Making sense of self-completing wholes: Epistemological travels of Hans
Driesch. In D. Carré, J. Valsiner, & S. Hampl (Eds.), Representing development: The social
construction of models of change (pp. 28–48). London: Routledge.
Valsiner, J. (2018). Needed in psychology: Theoretical precision. Europe's Journal of Psychology,
14(1), 1–6. https://doi.org/10.5964/ejop.v14i1.602.
Valsiner, J., & Salvatore, S. (2012). How idiographic science could create its own terminology. In
S. Salvatore, S., A. Gennaro, A., & J. Valsiner (Eds.) Making sense of infinite uniqueness. Vol.
4 of YIS: Yearbook of Idiographic Science. Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishers.
Van Geert, P. (Ed.). (1986). Theory building in developmental psychology. Amsterdam:
North-Holland.
Van Geert, P. (1988). The concept of transition in developmental theories. In W. J. Baker, L. P.
Mos, H. V. Rappard, & H. J. Stam (Eds.), Recent trends in theoretical psychology (pp. 225–
235). New York: Springer.
Van Geert, P. (1998). We almost had a great future behind us: The contribution of non-linear
dynamics to developmental-science-in-the-making. Developmental Science, 1, 143–159.
von Ehrenfels, C. (1932/1988). On Gestalt qualities (1932). In B. Smith (Ed.), Foundations of
gestalt theory (pp. 121–123). München: Philosophia Verlag.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1982/1927). Istoricheskii smysl psychologicheskogo krizisa [Historical sense
of the crisis in psychology]. In L. S. Vygotsky (Ed.), Sobranie sochinenii (Vol. 1). Moscow:
Pedagogika.
Wertheimer, M. (1982). Einstein: The thinking that led to the theory of relativity. In M. Wertheimer
(Ed.), Productive thinking (pp. 213–233). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Zittoun, T. (2008). Janet’s emotions in the whole of human conduct. In R. Diriwächter & J. Valsiner
(Eds.), Striving for the whole: Creating theoretical syntheses (pp. 111–129). New Brunswick,
NJ: Transaction.
Part II
Ethical and Aesthetical Compositions of
Psychological Generalization
Chapter 6
On the Worldliness of the General: Why
Concepts Matter Ethically
Jytte Bang
The core point of the present chapter is that the general can be conceived in opposite
manners depending on how the relationship of the individual and the environment
is approached. One position (dualism) assumes a dichotomy between the individual
mind and the environment, suggesting that psychology is a discipline which is
occupied with reflections caused by impressions received from the world. This
position is influenced by Descartes’ philosophy as well as by empiricism. An
opposite position considers a dichotomy between the individual (mind) and the
environment to be a major issue to psychology and argues that overcoming dualism
potentially changes the ways in which psychology and psychological phenomena
are conceived. From the perspective of its critiques, the dualist position is sometimes
thought of as “representational” theory or just “representationalism” indicating that
psyche is a cognitive activity which mirrors and combines (represent) impressions
from the outer world in mind. From such a position, the critique of dualism can be
referred to as critique of representationalism. The present chapter argues that these
two basic positions influence how we think about core-concepts in psychology—in
this particular case, about the general. The aim of the present chapter is (first) to
discuss the possibilities to get beyond a representational understanding of the
general and pave the way for a worldly and genetic (that is, historical/developmental)
approach. Furthermore, the chapter aims to discuss, how the different “psychologies
of the general” have ethical implications to psychology.
J. Bang (*)
Social Psychology of Everyday Life, Department of People and Technology, Roskilde
University, Roskilde, Denmark
e-mail: jyba@ruc.dk
senses (as sensations). These ideas may become connected and combined by the
operations of mind (the reflections). He says:
First, our senses, conversant about particular sensible objects, do convey into the mind
several distinct perceptions of things, according to those various ways wherein those objects
do affect them […]. This great source of most of the ideas we have, depending wholly upon
our senses, and derived by them to the understanding, I call sensation. […] Second, the
other fountain from which experience furnisheth the understanding with ideas is the
perception of the operations of our own minds within us, as it is employed about the ideas
it has got; which operations, when the soul comes to reflect on and consider, do furnish the
understanding with another set of ideas, which could not be had from things without. And
such are perception, thinking, doubting, believing, reasoning, knowing, willing, and all the
different actings of our minds; which we, being conscious of and observing in ourselves, do
from these receive into our understandings as distinct ideas as we do from bodies affecting
our senses. This source of ideas every man has wholly in himself; and though it be not
sense, as having nothing to do with external objects, yet it is very like it, and might properly
enough be called internal sense. But as I call the other sensation, so I call this reflection, the
ideas it affords being such only as the mind gets by reflecting on its own operations within
itself. (Locke 1961: 77f)
How does such a widely accepted dualism between sensation and reflection influ-
ence the ways in which psychology conceives the general? If accepting Locke’s line
of thought, it seems obvious that the general must be associated with reflection in
the mind of an individual; it is defined as generalization. According to Locke, when
simple ideas are received passively by mind based on sensations, mind actively
reflects on these simple ideas and combine them in various manners into complex
ideas, relations as more simultaneous ideas, and abstracts; that is, the discrimination
of ideas from other ideas and the formation of general ideas. Hence, it follows from
empiricism that the general is a mental construct and generalization is the process
in which mental operations work on the simple ideas to form general ideas.
Psychology becomes the study of how the individual’s senses meet the stimulations
from the world in terms of impressions (ideas); and (next) of the inner reflections
(wider, emotions) that follow the reception of ideas. Hence, the general is an out-
come of the individual mind’s cognitive processing.
environment. From this perspective, psychology is not just the discipline to study
cognition; rather, it is the discipline to study the (species-specific, niche-based)
manifold, complex, and practical exchanges of organisms with the environment.
Gibson’s view, and ecological psychology in general, settles psychology into the
history of practical, explorative activity of living organisms which opposes indi-
vidualized, passive and abstract notions of psyche. According to ecological theory,
psyche does not begin with the individual mind nor with cognitive operations.
Psyche begins with the historically developed meaningful activities of organisms in
their species-specific environments. It begins with active explorative activities of
the organisms (for discussion, see also Bang 2007, 2009). According to the ecologi-
cal perspective of Gibson, it is quite problematic to define the general merely with
reference to the individual mind. Rather, the general is a lived relationship, not just
a cognized one. Organisms live the general whenever they actively live their mean-
ingful relationships with the world. They live the common, historically developed,
environmental conditions of life—the general is a worldly phenomenon.
What does it mean that the general is a worldly phenomenon? In order to open up a
perspective on the general not limited by representationalism, a few theoretical
illustrations may be helpful. The illustrations are concerned with meaning relations
in nature and in human life and draw on the work of von Jakob von Uexküll, Niels
Engelsted, and Aleksej N. Leontjev.
Meaning Relations in Nature (First Illustration) Von Uexküll’s (1940/1982)
theory of meaning relations in nature presents the phenomenon of lived biological
relationships. One of his credits was that he showed how the biological environment
is different for different species and that the biological environment include
complexes of food, enemies, means for protection, etc. From the perspective of
identifying the general as a lived relationship, Von Uexküll’s theory is interesting
because he addresses how meaning resides in the invisible. Meaning is a kind of
(invisible, yet present) ‘plan’ behind the particular members of a species or the
particular environmental characteristics. From this theoretical perspective, the
‘plan’ mirrors a kind of ‘fit’ or mutuality between the species and the environment
and in this respect, it cannot be reduced to a single individual organism’s relationship
with specific environmental objects. Rather, von Uexküll’s idea of the ‘plan’ creates
a connection between the individual’s specific environmental relationships and the
general life conditions of the species to which the individual belongs. From this
perspective, meaning is theorized to be the general dimension of the individual-
environment relationship. This view of the general implies that the concrete and the
particular individual-environment relationships are genetic (i.e., historical, see
Wertsch 1985), they are specific outcomes of ongoing historical processes. From
this perspective, the general is the relational character of the biologically founded
6 On the Worldliness of the General: Why Concepts Matter Ethically 105
The object is the other-being of the subject. As long as the organism is living, and thus a
subject, its biological relation to the food is always a very present reality. Environmentally,
106 J. Bang
however, the subject can be, and often is, separated from its food. This absence of the food-
object (and thereby the absence of the positive stimulus for the consummatory response)
also confronts the organism as reality. The behavior of auto-kinesis as designed by natural
selection serves to bridge the two realities, so the environmental reality does not refute the
biological. Auto-kinesis is at the same time a behavioral expression of the connection and
of the disconnection between subject and object. (1989: 40).
A general conclusion based on the analysis of auto-kinesis is, that psyche is teleo-
logical activity. Teleological activity is a lived relationship of an organism with the
world into which the general relationship (organisms must eat to survive) is already
embedded. As a phenomenon, psyche mirrors a real biological relationship of an
organism with its environment. This implies that the general is not to be defined
merely as a mind phenomenon; it is not to be understood merely as a result of cogni-
tive reflections and generalizations based on ‘ideas.’ Psyche (teleological activity) is
in itself a general worldly phenomenon which emerges long before cognition.
Therefore, psychic activity is not bound to, and not defined by, the individual mind.
This shift of view implies that (1) one cannot uphold the idea that an organism
responds solely to the immediate stimuli from the surroundings (even though it also
does so); (2) the organism is not passive but active and unfolds spontaneous activity;
(3) the first instances of the general is not defined as an individual cognitive act.
Rather, it is a worldly relationship not reducible to a single individual’s particular
exchange with the particular present aspects of its environment. As argued above,
the relationship of an individual with the world is a historical one, an outcome of the
general changes of the conditions of life across of time.
Meaning Relations in Human Life (Third Illustration) From von Uexküll as
well as from Engelsted we learn that there are reasons for theoretical optimism as
for conceiving the general in terms of relational ontology. Does this kind of insight
still make sense when it comes to humans who have the capacity of reflection and
therefore seem to serve as good examples of representationalism’s approach to the
general? Let us assume that the basic insights from relational ontology is continuous
with human life. What might be the theoretical evidence to support such an
assumption? Drawing on Marxist philosophy, one may suggest that the collaborative
and creative processes by which humans create their own conditions of life construct
rich and varied general relations and that these general relations appear in the shape
of meaningful particulars. For example, a chair is a particular, which mirrors the
general relationship of humans and their societal needs (sit and eat, sit and read, sit
and play, sit and sew, etc.). From such a perspective one may suggest a certain kind
of parallel between the general analyzed in the examples above and the general in
terms of human cultural life. In the historical processes of human life, humans
transform nature and give shape to various kinds of human praxis and values. All
sorts of things (artifacts) are included into these processes and so are value based
institutional arrangements, relationships, materiality, norms, activities, discourses,
etc.
This perspective has two theoretical implications: (1) the general is a collective,
collaborative (historical) phenomenon produced and changed over time by humans;
6 On the Worldliness of the General: Why Concepts Matter Ethically 107
(2) individuals come to know about the historically produced general in practical
terms by living it in their everyday practical life—they practice the general, they do
not just cognize it.
From this perspective it follows that it is not possible to conceive an individual
person abstractly as isolated from his or her historical context. There is no such
thing as a ‘pure’ act of the mind merely based on ‘ideas’ passively received from
outside the individual. The individual lives in a historically constituted and pre-
ordered practical world, which is loaded with other people and their relations in all
possible (complex and contradictory) ways. A child ‘stumbles’ over the complexities
of the practical world and begins the process of living the general. According to
Aleksei N. Leontjev (1977), human consciousness is not just determined by
surrounding things and phenomena but rather by being, that is, by the actual life of
people. He suggests the concept of ‘activity’ as the process of inter-traffic between
opposite poles, the individual and the environment. By focusing on the practical
activities of life, psychology does no longer limit itself to ‘inner’ activities. It is the
practical activities as part of societal praxis, which link the individual with the
world. Leontjev’s concept of ‘the Fifth Quasi-Dimension’ is helpful to illustrate this
point. Leontjev (1982: 8) emphasizes that what we perceive is not just the form of
an object but the system of meaning (System der Bedeutungen) that the object is
(whether a cup, a clock, or other things). Systems of meaning may be thought of as
the general relationships created historically by humans. For example, clocks can
have different shapes and appearances. Despite these perceived differences, they all
mirror the general meaning of a ‘clock’ being: an object produced for the purpose
of measure time in a time-measuring society. This general meaning of ‘clock’
(regardless of its specific perceivable appearance) is its defining characteristic. In
general, artifacts mirror and co-organize such general historically created human
relationships. An object is what it is because it is involved into social praxis and is
meaningful as part of this. The concept of the ‘fifth quasi-dimension’ grasps the
humanly produced general, which lies behind any specific and particular object
(e.g., the variety of clocks). Hence, Leontjev breaks off from what he calls ‘the
axiom of immediacy’ and this break off is fully in line both with the ideas of von
Uexküll and Engelsted. According to the axiom of immediacy, there is nothing more
to the object than the sensual impression they make on a perceiver (a return to the
passively receiving subject). Objects, in this sense, is but singular immediate
‘impressions’—a view strongly associated with empiricism as argued earlier. From
the perspective of the axiom of immediacy, any clock seems different from any
other clock because of their sensual differences. The general idea of what a clock is
can only be described in limited ways as an outcome of individual cognizing activity
leading to a generalization based on the connection of ideas and not as a lived
general. Alternatively, Leontjev suggests that the general are lived phenomena,
which originate in human creative processes and exists in terms of the artifacts and
relationships which characterize the human world. Again, these ideas suggest that
there is a continuation from the analysis of meaning relations in nature to meaning
relations in human life. Within both realms, there is a lived general.
108 J. Bang
It would be wrong to conclude that a critique of empiricism and its way to approach
the general is of theoretical interest only. On the contrary, just like other concepts in
psychology have the potentials to influence how we think about humans, society,
societal norms and standards, ethics, etc., so does the concept of the general. This
part of the chapter will discuss why and how conceiving of the general matters. The
first two parts of the present chapter discussed of the influence of empiricism on
psychology and the theoretical controversies concerning definitions of the general.
These kinds of controversies go back to the question of what is it that constitutes
psychology as a discipline, what is its basic unit of analysis and, hence, what defines
psyche: does psychology begin “in the head” of the single individual or does
psychology begin with the interrelationship of individuals with the world—not just
in an immediate sense but in the sense of history (phylo-, cultural, and ontogenesis)?
The point is that the general is defined differently depending on how one defines,
what psychology is about and what is its basic unit of analysis. Further, the point is
that the empiricist approach falls short to include history and that this is less than
helpful when it comes to overcoming dualism and its consequences. Therefore, in
the next part, focus will be the potential (and problematic) and ethical (hence,
human-political) consequences of adapting a dualist and empiricist position with
regard to the concept of the general. Hopefully it will become clear that concepts—
even words—are not value-free. Rather, they have the capacity to direct both
attention and thinking in certain ways. In this sense, they co-contribute to the
common ways in which to think about humans, political events, and ethics, all of
which belong to the societal realities.
With regard to societal realities, empiricist thought going out from John Locke has
been very influential. Locke did not only outline his theory of human knowledge,
identity, and selfhood from which the present chapter has quoted. He also contributed
in fundamental ways to Enlightenment and to the development of liberalism, which
grew out of a general critique of the power of the state and of the church.
Enlightenment thinkers are commonly associated with the ideas of freedom and of
freedom of thought (for a discussion, see Taylor 1999), and these are regarded
essential in order to allow humanity to achieve progress in societal life. Therefore,
it is no wonder that the next step in the present chapter is to discuss the association
of the general with those ideas. Edward Said (2004) emphasizes that Enlightenment,
with its idea of “the sovereignity of the subject,” made the cogito the center of all
human knowledge and in this manner contributed to essentializing thought in itself.
Several influential theorists, among them Karl Marx, challenged this idea and put a
focus on the fact that humans are not individually free but co-contribute to, hence
6 On the Worldliness of the General: Why Concepts Matter Ethically 109
frame, their own conditions of life in society. This challenged the liberal idea of the
“free individual” and framed the individual as a societal being. If we follow Said’s
suggestion to think of humanism in terms of an ongoing practice which includes a
critical humanistic stance (rather than in terms of rejecting humanism), it is possible
to open up for an understanding of how the struggle about the general is associated
with human-political, that is, ethical, issues. In order to discuss these possible
ideological connections, it is relevant to look into the work of scholars, who
discusses Enlightenment from a general humanistic and political perspective.
In his book The Conditions of Postmodernity, David Harvey (1990) analyzes the
project of modernity, which came into focus during the eighteenth century as an
effort on the part of Enlightenment thinkers “to develop objective science, universal
morality and law, and autonomous art according to their inner logic” (Habermas
1983, as cited in Harvey 1990: 12). Harvey emphasizes that Enlightenment thought
embraced the idea of progress—it sought to actively break with history and tradition.
In relation to this self-understanding of Enlightenment, he characterizes modernity
as a secular movement, which aimed to demystify knowledge and social organization
in order to liberate human beings from their chains. Harvey describes the ideas in
this way:
The scientific domination of nature promised freedom from scarcity, want, and the arbitrari-
ness of natural calamity. The development of rational forms of social organization and
rational modes of thought promised liberation from the irrationalities of myth, religion,
superstition, release from the arbitrary use of power as well as from the dark side of our
human natures. Only through such a project could the universal, eternal, and the immutable
qualities of all of humanity be revealed. (1990: 12)
In line with this view, Dreyfus and Taylor (2015) suggest that the idea of the “idea”
came under the influence of the mechanization of the worldview associated with the
scientific revolution. This association implies that the subject–object relationship is
viewed a mechanical one: “Perception, considered as a process in material nature,
could best be conceived as the impression created in the mind by surrounding
reality” (Dreyfus and Taylor 2015: 9). One can see how this kind of mechanization
is not far away from Locke’s passively receiving individual.
Theodor W. Adorno and Max Horkheimer (1944/1999) were concerned about
the negative political consequences of Enlightenment as well. Writing not only
under the overall influence of the nineteenth century and the scientific revolution
but, more darkly, under the impression of World War II, of which they experienced
the consequences, they likewise characterize the contradictory character of
Enlightenment movements. They found that the ideal of Enlightenment (both in its
rationalist and empiricist versions) is a system from which all and everything
follows. They seem highly concerned about the totalitarian potentialities of the
Enlightenment movements when they unfold under certain political-historical
conditions. Because of these structural determinations, “the multiplicity of forms is
reduced to position and arrangement, history to fact, things to matter.” (Adorno and
Horkheimer 1944/1999: 7). Further, formal logic, being the major school of a
unified science, provided Enlightenment thinkers with tools for the calculability of
the world. In their view, numbers are not a neutral means for counting; rather,
numbers become the “canon of Enlightenment” (Adorno and Horkheimer
1944/1999: 7). In a similar way, “numbering” the world is not an isolated and
scientifically solid achievement based on which humanity and the world as such do
progress. Quite on the contrary, numbering the world implies that what is dissimilar
is made comparable by reducing it to abstract quantities. From an overall perspective,
this implies that the ideas of Enlightenment to set humans free from the abstract
powers of dogma and religion turns into a negation once the “abstract quantities”
take over as a general standard. It becomes a tool for domination of people in that
general standards are being established as chains, which become the tools for ruling
the everyday lives of people. When numbers rule, that which does not reduce to
numbers becomes an illusion, a deviancy from the “normal.” The strong consequences
of this movement are that there is no room for qualities, these are being destructed,
variations and dynamic movements of people’s ordinary lives and the possibility of
people to influence their lives are being neglected, and nature is shown no respect
but is turned into mere objectivity and a tool. Adorno and Horkheimer raise a strong
concern about the human and political consequences of these reductions of worldly
qualities into numbers and quantities. They say:
Men pay for the increase of their power with alienation from that over which they exercise
their power. Enlightenment behaves toward things as a dictator toward men. He knows them
in so far as he can manipulate them. The man of science knows things in so far as he can
make them. (1944/1999: 12)
Harvey follows the concern that the Enlightenment optimism turns upside down:
6 On the Worldliness of the General: Why Concepts Matter Ethically 111
The twentieth century – with its death camps and death squads, its militarism and two world
wars, its threat of nuclear annihilation and its experience of Hiroshima and Nagasaki – has
certainly shattered this optimism. Worse still, the suspicion lurks that the Enlightenment
project was doomed to turn against itself and transform the quest for human emancipation
into a system of universal oppression in the name of human liberation. (1990: 13)
Learning from these theorists, the combination of an ahistorical and dualistic view
of the individual person and the general intrumentalization and “numbering” of
society and of human relations under the conditions of current neoliberalism,
requires of psychology to be aware of its own conceptual contributions to this state
of things. If psychology defines itself on the ground of dualism and representation-
alism and considers this a value-free stance, psychology may end up contributing
to the instrumentalization processes sketched by the above mentioned theorists.
112 J. Bang
This may happen by singling out individuals to be the beginning and end of his or
her own life—including his or her “own” problems and/or own “successes.” It may
happen by offering reduced and individualistic analyses of the psychological issues
that people experience even if, in fact, these seem epidemic. The current increase
of psychological issues such as anxiety, depression, and low self-esteem among
young people (especially girls) in the Western world serves as an illustration of
epidemic phenomena, which are dealt with individualistically. Consequently, a
“blame the victim” approach may be one of the serious ethical issues following an
ahistorical, non-dynamic, and dualistic approach to the individual in psychology.
In opposition to this view, a historical and developmental approach (like the ones
outlined earlier in the present chapter) suggests an integral level of understanding,
which include dynamics (economic, political, and institutional), in order to under-
stand individuals as societal beings. This will help understand epidemic psycho-
logical issues as a matter of individual opportunities to deal with shared
(problematic) societal conditions of life. According to such an approach, focus is
put on the dynamic relationship of individuals and the social realities of their
everyday lives (Dreier 2016; Schraube and Højholt 2019, Chap. 1 in this volume).
In this case, the general is part of systemic qualities of the environment, which
opens up for treating psychological issues (also) at a systemic and societal level
(political, institutional, and discursive). However, if taking departure in representa-
tionalism, the general supports an understanding of psychological issues as resid-
ing inside the head of an individual and consequently suggests individualistic
approaches to be the most effective. To sum up, the general is in play as a core
concept whenever someone (psychologists, other professionals, political decision-
makers, etc.) addresses psychological issues as well as issues concerning humans
and the conditions of human life in general.
It seems appropriate to finish the present chapter by referring to the work of Victor
Klemperer, who rightly emphasized the importance of concepts and language use to
societal practices in his book Language of the Third Reich. In order to illustrate how
the struggle about concepts is also a struggle about practical life conditions, about
power, humanism, and freedom, let me quote Klemperer’s analyses of the concept
of “heroism.” In the first introductory chapter of the book he says:
Only in the rarest cases am I convinced by heroism when it blows its own trumpet in public
and makes sure that success is all-too-handsomely rewarded. Heroism is purer and more
significant the quieter it is, the less audience it has, the less it furthers the hero himself, and
the less it is decorated. My criticism of the Nazi concept of heroism is that it is always
shackled to decoration and vainglorious. Officially Nazism didn’t recognize any kind of
decent, real heroism. It thereby perverted the whole notion and brought it into dispute. [real
heroism] led to the purest kind of heroism, but on the other side so to speak. I am thinking
6 On the Worldliness of the General: Why Concepts Matter Ethically 113
of the many brave people in the concentration camps, of all those people who recklessly
committed illegal acts. (1957/2013: 6)
In the light of how conceptual struggles link with societal processes and the condi-
tions of everyday life of people, today this re-actualizes for what Horkheimer (1947:
92) terms a “revolt of human nature” against the instrumental reason and its oppres-
sive power. Even though the present chapter does not necessarily completely agree
to take departure in Freudian thought of “human nature,” it agrees that a revolt is
needed and that it is urgent for psychology to develop its concepts in close connec-
tion with life processes.
References
Adorno, T. W., & Horkheimer, M. (1944/1999). Dialectic of enlightenment. London and New York:
Verso.
Bang, J. (2007). An ecological approach to thinking. Journal of Anthropological Psychology, 18.
Aarhus Universitet.
Bang, J. (2009). Nothingness and the human Umwelt—A cultural-ecological approach to mean-
ing. Integrative Psychological and Behavioral Science, 43(4), 374–392.
Bernstein, R. J. (1983). Beyond objectivism and relativism. Science, hermeneutics, and praxis.
Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Costall, A. (2007). The windowless room: ‘Mediationism’ and how to get over it. In J. Valsiner &
A. Rosa (Eds.), Cambridge handbook of sociocultural psychology (pp. 109–123). Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Dreier, O. (2016). Conduct of everyday life: Implications for critical psychology. In E. Schraube &
C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 15–33). London: Routledge.
Dreyfus, H., & Taylor, C. (2015). Retrieving realism. Cambridge, London: Harvard University
Press.
Engelsted, N. (1989). What is the psyche and how did it get into the world? In N. Engelsted,
L. Hem, & J. Mammen (Eds.), Essays in general psychology—Seven Danish contributions
(pp. 13–48). Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Favrholdt, D. (1965). John Locke. Indledning (pp. X–y). København: Berlingske Forlag.
Gibson, J. J. (1966). The senses considered as perceptual systems. Boston: Houghton Mifflin
Company.
Harvey, D. (1990). The condition of postmodernity. Hoboken, NJ: Blackwell.
Harvey, D. (2005). A brief history of neoliberalism. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Horkheimer, M. (1947). Eclipse of reason. New York: Oxford University Press.
Klemperer, V. (1957/2013). Language of the Third Reich. London, New Delhi, New York, Sidney:
Bloomsbury.
Leontjev, A. N. (1977). Activity and consciousness. In Philosophy in the USSR: Problem of dialec-
tical materialism (pp. 180–202). Moscow: Progress Publishers.
Leontjev, A. N. (1982). Psychologie des Abbilds. In B. Grüter, F. Haug, K. Holzkamp, U. H.
Osterkamp, W. Maiers, M. Markard, & C. Ohm (Eds.), Handlungstheorie, Anthropologie,
Theorie-Praxis, Faschismus (pp. 5–19). Forum Kritischer Psychologie.
Locke, J. (1961). An essay concerning human understanding (Vol. 1). London: J. M. Dent & Sons.
Rose, N. (2007). Powers of freedom. Reframing political thought. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Said, E. W. (2004). Humanism and democratic criticism. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Schraube, E., & Højholt, C. (2019). Subjectivity and knowledge: The formation of situated gen-
eralization in psychological research. In C. Højholt & E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity and
114 J. Bang
knowledge: Generalization in the psychological study of everyday life (pp. 1–19). New York:
Springer.
Taylor, C. (1999). Hegel. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Uexküll, J. V. (1940/1982). The theory of meaning. Semiotica, 42-1, 25–82.
Wertsch, J. (1985). Vygotsky and the social formation of mind. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press.
Chapter 7
Generalizing Together with Children:
The Significance of Children’s Concepts
for Mutual Knowledge Creation
Niklas Alexander Chimirri
N. A. Chimirri (*)
Social Psychology of Everyday Life, Department of People and Technology,
Roskilde University, Roskilde, Denmark
e-mail: chimirri@ruc.dk
entangled part of safeguarding and developing human life. To move toward a more
democratic, codevelopmental knowledge creation praxis that systematically
includes children, the chapter builds on dialectical praxis psychologies to propose a
number of necessary conceptual reconfigurations on the ontological, the epistemo-
logical, the methodological, and the ethical level:
1. The first reconfiguration regards the researcher’s own positioning in relation to
the children, whom the researcher intends to engage in research together with. It
departs from Childhood Studies’ methodological principle of ethical symmetry,
and further expands it in terms of acknowledging ontological symmetry on epis-
temically asymmetric grounds across researchers and co-researchers, irrespec-
tive of whether they are adults or children.
2. Secondly, the notion of scientific generalization is reconfigured, as necessarily
related to everyday knowledge. This reconfiguration is of relevance, as it desta-
bilizes rationalistic forms of knowledge that are primarily associated to more
declarative “adult” thinking, and shows how more tacit and procedural forms of
knowledge are central to scientific knowledge creation.
3. In prolongation of this dialectical conceptual move, it is thereafter shown how
scientific generalizations are always process- and context-bound and are con-
stantly re-situated in everyday life in order to make sense of them and put them
to work. At the same time, scientific generalizations also supersede the respec-
tive situation, and make it possible to imagine alternative means and ends. This
is illustrated via an example from a theater project conducted together with pre-
school children at a Danish daycare institution, in which scientific generaliza-
tions framed all other generalizations, while also being transformed in the
process via everyday experiences and knowledges of children, pedagogical staff,
parents, and the researcher.
4. In conclusion, the praxis-philosophical concept of teleogenetic collaboration is
suggested as a possibility to gather these conceptual reconfigurations and to
thereby give both researchers and other adults working together with children an
alternative self-understanding of their role in the mutual learning processes that
they engage in alongside the children. It posits scientific research and general-
izing as part of everyday life, rather than as aiming for the study of other people’s
everyday life, and aims for its generalizations to become more immediately
accessible and negotiable for everyone irrespective of age.
Hence, the chapter problematizes that the presumed inferior relevance of children’s
knowledges depends not only on what tends to be considered truly significant
knowledge, for instance so-called “scientific generalizations” that appear detached
from, and are therefore deemed superior to, everyday knowledge. It particularly
problematizes that children’s generalizations are seen as largely insignificant to
societal knowledge creation. On these grounds, the chapter gives an insight into
how epistemological discourses (how is significant knowledge understood and cre-
ated?) are entangled with ontological discourses (who or what is it that creates this
significant knowledge, adults or children, majorities or minorities, etc.?), which in
turn are deeply entangled with ethical-political discourses (whose knowledge is con-
118 N. A. Chimirri
sidered valuable given the role children play in a specific context and practice,
including the research practice?). Or to formulate the chapter’s research question in
a more empirical-practical manner: What do we adults lose from sight and experi-
ence, if we continue neglecting children’s knowledges as significant part of main-
taining and transforming human life?
By this [ethical symmetry] we mean that the researcher takes as his or her starting point the
view that the ethical relationship between researcher and informant is the same whether he
or she conducts research with adults or with children. This has a number of implications.
The first is that the researcher employs the same ethical principles whether they are
researching children or adults. Second, that each right and ethical consideration in relation
to adults in the research process has its counterpart for children. Third, the symmetrical
treatment of children in research means that any differences between carrying out research
with children or with adults should be allowed to arise from this starting point, according to
the concrete situation of children, rather than being assumed in advance.
Thus, from this point of view, researchers do not have to use particular methods or,
indeed, work with a different set of ethical standards when working with children. Rather it
means that the practices employed in the research have to be in line with children’s experi-
ences, interests, values and everyday routines. (p. 482)
Striving for ethical symmetry does not deny that children may be participating in
research differently than adults. But this approach explicitly acknowledges that
these differences are societally arranged, and should not be presumed as natural
given. Researchers should, therefore, not a priori decide to ethically relate to chil-
dren in a different manner than they do to adults throughout their research engage-
ments. Rather, the relational and processual emergence of these differences from
within the research process, ergo how the adult researcher gradually starts relating
to the participating children differently than to the participating adults, are a crucial
source of knowledge in order to learn about the children’s everyday experiences,
interests, values, and routines, and in particular about their possibilities of contribut-
ing to social life. It is via ethical symmetry as a study’s methodological point of
departure that child(hood) researchers can draw on their own, critically self-reflexive
experiences of gradually treating children differently, in spite of their initially sym-
metrical grounding, in order to further generalize the inequality-propelling societal
arrangements of children’s everyday lives that render a more participatory research
with children impossible. Without being able to go into too much detail with this
methodology (see, e.g., Salamon 2015, who shows how an ethical-symmetrical
research project can be implemented even with infants), meanwhile, the most
important questions to be posed in the context of this chapter on knowledge co-
creation are: Who is the nominal knowledge producer in an ethical-symmetrical
project à la Christensen and Prout (2002), and who benefits from the knowledge
produced in this way? What status is granted to children’s knowledges in this
approach?
While strongly sympathizing with the central idea that the researcher is to posi-
tion herself in an ethical-symmetrical way, by bracketing presumptions and expec-
tations on how a participatory project with children should play out, including what
knowledge should thereby be produced, one problem persists that obstructs mean-
ingful knowledge co-creation with children: It is the researcher who, out of ethical
and methodological considerations, decides on whether she wishes to implement
her research with children based on this ethical-symmetrical strategy. Ethical sym-
metry is explicitly considered a methodological strategy in Christensen and Prout’s
(2002) original conceptualization, and does thus not question the underlying onto-
logical and epistemological presumption that researchers and their “co-researchers”
120 N. A. Chimirri
(as the children are also termed in this approach) are two fundamentally different
categories of people. In their quest of wanting to let the researchers and co-
researchers critically inquire into the commonly taken-for-granted categories of
adult/child in an ethical-symmetrical way, by showing that ontological and episte-
mological differences essentially emerge from within the research process in the
context of its broader societal arrangements, Christensen and Prout do not suffi-
ciently focus on questioning the researcher/researched binary alongside the adult/
child binary. It remains up to the academic researcher’s goodwill to choose whether
or not her research gets grounded in an ethical-symmetrical starting point. Moreover,
while the researcher may thereby—strategically—attain a different knowledge
about the societal arrangements that propel difference between adults and children,
it remains unclear what it is that the participating children get out of such explora-
tions. What becomes of the children’s “differing” knowledges here?
Instead of considering ethical symmetry a methodological-strategical decision
that depends on the researcher’s goodwill, I will in the next subsection draw on
Psychology from the Standpoint of the Subject (PSS) in order to propose that
knowledge co-creation, i.e., mutually learning together with children, is an onto-
logical and epistemological necessity for human learning on a general level. A
more symmetrical ethics follows from this premise. If not acknowledging this
premise, research generalizations emerging from studying institutionalized contexts
with children (including the less regulated in-between spaces; e.g., Eßer and Sitter
2018) continue foregrounding their epistemic and practical significance for adult
researchers and/or other professionals, and at times parents. What relevance the
thereby created knowledge has for children is, if at all, discussed in relation to how
adults can improve their understandings of or conditions for acting on/with chil-
dren. But should for instance, from an ethical-symmetrical co-researcher stance,
generalizations not also be relevant for children in a more immediate manner, so
that they can actually influence the knowledge products while they are being created
in situ by participating in the research process—rather than regarding children’s
research participation and scientific knowledge creation as two separate processes,
where children contribute to the latter only by adult researcher proxy mediation, and
thus in a tokenistic manner (cf. Mannion 2010)?
As will be argued, a universalizing methodological principle such as Christensen
and Prout’s ethical symmetry can, from a perspective grounded in PSS, really only
be a starting point for situated processes of knowledge co-creation with children. In
addition, these processes must systematically include children and their knowledges
as equivalently significant and yet differently anchored contributions, i.e., differ-
ently situated in terms of unique life experiences, positionings, imaginations, etc.,
to understanding and tackling pressing societal issues in concrete everyday life
practice. Dialogical knowledge exchange across generationed boundaries becomes
key as the world we adults and children inhabit is the same but can be understood
and lived in innumerably different ways. In order to further understand the potenti-
ality (as well as the dangers) certain knowledges of the world point to, children’s
knowledges ought to be taken more seriously and conceptually better grasped. This
requires reconfiguring widely spread notions of generalization, which arrange and
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 121
cannot know it all on our own (see also Axel 2011). Understanding the other as a
coequal center of intentionality and thereby creating an intersubjective symmetrical
reciprocity among one another, is a prerequisite and distinguishing feature of human
sociality, of being able to think socially and herewith act purposefully together.
Opting for ethical symmetry in research with children, as Christensen and Prout
(2002) call for, is on the grounds of Schraube’s propositions not merely a kind of
strategic decision, or even worse a mere token gesture, that researchers offer to
their co-researchers given their privileged position in society. From a subject-sci-
entific, critical PSS viewpoint such as Schraube’s, researchers (or anyone else) are
not able to engage in purposeful social thinking and acting on children’s everyday
living conditions without presuming and departing from an intersubjectively sym-
metrical relationship with their co-researchers—by engaging in mutual learning
processes and herein ontologically acknowledging them as coequal centers of
intentionality and agency (cf. Højholt and Kousholt 2019). The consequence of
not departing from this symmetrical understanding between researcher and
researched, between adult and child, between me and you and you, between all of
us, would be that epistemic asymmetry across children and adults could not be
purposefully tackled via dialogical exploration and knowledge co-creation, and
more general insights into child–adult relations and human living conditions
would be rendered impossible. Human cross-generational sociality would gradu-
ally wither, as adults could not meaningfully communicate with and make sense of
children, while irrespectively taking decisions on their behalf, and children could
not make sense of adults, feeling left paternalized and without agency. Opting for
ethical symmetry in child(hood) research, as well as in any other research involv-
ing human beings, thus becomes an ontological necessity, and arguably, a conditio
sine qua non for human survival.
In order to truly honor an ethically ontologically intersubjective symmetry that
bridges the presumed child/adult binary as well as the researcher/researched binary,
thus facilitating communication, mutual learning, reciprocal sensemaking and
thereby knowledge co-creation across generational and other societal (di)visions of
labor, research with children and any other human, being requires a conceptual
reconfiguration of what scientific knowledge is and of what it is good for. Knowledge
is not merely an abstract generalization, a product generated by researching scien-
tists enclosed behind hermetic walls, only accessible via academic journals, or
when digested and reinterpreted by journalists, policy-makers, etc. This form of
knowledge creation is the absolute exception. Rather, knowledge is produced in
everyday praxis, by everyone, all the time. Knowledge products are constantly put
into action, applied, negotiated, reconfigured, in the process of everyday living by
adults and by children. Paradoxically, however, and in spite of many pragmatist as
well as praxis philosophers’ counterarguments, the creation and performance of
everyday knowledges continue to appear as largely detached from the creation and
performance of scientific knowledges in societal discourses: the generalizations that
constitute everyday knowledges are somehow granted less significance than those
that constitute scientific knowledges. But why is that so? Do all generalizations not
only become societally significant if rendered relevant for everyday life? Are s cience
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 123
and the generalizations it creates not just as much immanent to everyday life as any
other knowledge?
For children and other research participants to have a say in creating scientific gen-
eralizations, and thus be symmetrically considered coequal centers of intentionality
in co-research processes, the notion of scientific generalization needs to be recon-
figured in a way that does not artificially detach it from everyday life, but that fur-
ther clarifies its generalizations’ relevance for mutually learning together as concrete
daily praxis. An important step in this process is to reconsider how generalizations
relevant to children could be understood as co-creating scientifically relevant knowl-
edge. As will be argued for, this requires us to analyze the relationship between
scientific knowledges and everyday knowledges with a focus on the role of general-
ization in everyday life, and on these grounds pinpoint the dialectical ontology of
generalization as product and process in everyday life, including the dialectical
interplay between declarative and procedural knowledge. The upcoming theoretical
discussion, which emphasizes the inner relatedness of scientific and everyday con-
cepts, is based on my participation in a long-term pedagogical daycare project that
gradually analyzed and generalized fellow learning processes in order to create a
theater play—a project which, in its efforts to continuously interrelate scientific and
everyday products in these processes, will be suggested as an initial prototype for
future transgenerational knowledge co-creation.1
The interplay between scientific and everyday knowledge creation, as well as
between generalizations as both product and process, has been of particular interest
for the cultural-historical research tradition of psychology—a tradition that has
strongly influenced Psychology from the Standpoint of the Subject (PSS), also
given its fellow dialectical, praxis-philosophical roots. Since its inception in the
1920s, children’s development, knowledge creation, and learning processes have
constituted the most important empirical focus of cultural-historical psychology.
The tradition’s founder, Lev S. Vygotsky, extensively researched how children learn
about and form concepts, as generalized and yet context-specific knowledge prod-
ucts. Drawing on Vygotsky’s work, Sikder and Fleer (2015) highlight the interrela-
tion between everyday concepts and scientific concepts:
A cultural-historical view of concept formation in young children foregrounds the impor-
tance of context, in conjunction with the dynamic and evolving nature of concept formation
… There are two dimensions of concept development—everyday concepts and scientific
concepts—which are related. (p. 447)
According to the authors, play activities become crucial for developing thinking and
producing generalizations, understood here as concept formation. The authors cite
Vygotsky (1966):
The concepts are not simply a collection of associative connections learned with the aid of
memory. The child’s concepts can be improved to a higher level through consciousness. So
concepts develop. At any stage of its development, the concept is an act of generalization
which is Elementary Generalization and higher forms of generalization. Direct instruction
in concepts is impossible. Then the child does not learn the concept; only imitate the word
through memory rather than thought. (pp. 169–170; cited in Sikder and Fleer 2015: 447)
2
According to Dafermos (2018: 161), Vygotsky preferred the term everyday concepts over Piaget’s
term spontaneous concepts. I will henceforth draw on Vygotsky’s preferred term.
3
Meaningfulness is here related to a person’s development of knowledge: If one is instructed to
learn, it could still be considered relevant for the person to learn in order to shirk reprimanding or
other forms of punishment. But then the person will foremost learn something about social hierar-
chies and obedience, rather than learn about the content-knowledge that it is supposed to be
instructed in.
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 125
We do research for purposes of living, and theories of social and psychological life are just
some of the tools we employ in the process (others are art and education). This also means
that literally anything that we encounter in our lives can become material in and for our
inquiries. (Brinkmann 2015: 412)
While in daily conversation with each other, we do not necessarily consider how we
all the time draw on and potentially develop theoretical generalizations, or what we
now, following Vygotsky’s notion that scientific concepts are syntheses of everyday
concepts, else may call “scientific knowledge.” All generalizations are part of acting
in everyday life, of praxis. And all of these generalizations can, in line with
Brinkmann, become a matter worth analyzing, irrespective of how abstract or mun-
dane they appear. Meanwhile, considering them as “tools,” as Brinkmann does in
the above citation, may make it sound as if they were just “out there” in the world
for our taking, as instruments for better controlling the world. In his chapter about
using one’s own experiences as a subject matter of inquiry, however, Brinkmann is
among others building on Tim Ingold’s (2011) sociomaterial anthropology of every-
day life as well as pragmatist educational philosophy. His above statement therefore
rather proposes that theoretical generalizations are an inextricable part of being
human, of our bodies, our perception, our affects, that means: of our everyday
lively doings.
Read in this light, Brinkmann’s understanding of theoretical generalizations
stands in stark opposition to positivist notions of theories as representational tools,
tools that are expected to represent “truth” in as universally valid as possible ways:
independent of the concrete environment they emerged from and are used in, and
independent of the researcher, i.e., of the observing, analyzing, and writing knowl-
edge creator. Such an epistemology tends to confound theoretical generalization
with universalization, in that it aims at offering context-independent and thus
detached-rationalist explanations of a phenomenon that can be imposed onto other
phenomena that may sound or look familiar. This kind of “theoretical tools” is
meant to represent and render manageable a relatively stable truth of the world that
is out there for human instrumental scrutiny and taking, thereby excluding truths
that are situated, dynamically changing, inherently contradictory, and in that sense
complex. A fictitious example: say that a positivistically grounded study found a
statistically significant positive correlation between using a specifically programmed
teaching robot and boys’ learning acquisition, a study repeatedly reproduced over
the course of a few weeks across a selected, supposedly representative number of
preschools in Denmark. In the interpretation of this probabilistically generalized
correlative result, the positive correlation suddenly becomes translated into a
theoretical representation that can easily be read in a universalist manner (for
126 N. A. Chimirri
4
Unethical because it ignores the situative historicity of being human and circumvents any fellow
exploration of knowledge.
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 127
arrangements. What Wallace describes as the “anhedonic state” cannot make people
thrive, as it hinders meaningful collaboration. And in Vygotsky’s sense, it is not
truly scientific concepts or generalizations that this kind of detached knowledge is
operating on, even though it comes close to what may often be deemed “scientific
knowledge”: artificially abstracting ideas, universal and thus context-independent,
denotation without connotation, schemata, maps, mere representations, detached
from their affective content—and I would add: with a focus on the knowledge prod-
ucts alone, and not on its processes of (joint) sensemaking and creation. Wallace’s
“anhedonic state” reciprocates the universalist fallacy, “the reduction of similarity
to sameness” (Valsiner 2014: 241), of conceiving originally context-dependent
knowledge as universally and thus context-independently valid.
although not necessarily actualized as such: They are virtually (Kontopodis 2012)
or imaginatively (Sieland 2017) present at all times, and in consequence not neces-
sarily in an explicit, articulated manner. Generalizations lead to a knowledge not
only of what, for instance, an “arm” is, but also how an “arm” feels, or more pre-
cisely: of how my arm feels in relation to what I know about what an “arm” is and
how an “arm” feels to others I have talked to about it, heard about, read about, etc.
Most often, though, I do not explicitly think about and thereby consciously actualize
the generalized “arm” concept that is imaginatively embodied in my theorizing.
Usually I only explicitly actualize the concept once my experience of it changes its
qualities.
Most of the generalizations we draw on, instead, loom in the vague shadows of
imagined future trajectories, of what we both explicitly and tacitly hope our knowl-
edge may help us some day with doing, technically and/or emancipatorily.
Generalizations are only seldom consciously presenced and explicitly actualized.
Yet, I propose, even the more unconsciously, vaguely-imaginatively present gener-
alizations orient our knowledge creation processes at any time, are thereby them-
selves constantly worked out and negotiated, actualizing our conceptual
(everyday-scientific) knowledge. One could say that such imaginatively “present”
generalizations act as a vague telic or action-orienting premise for acting (cf. Sieland
and Chimirri in press), and with it, a vaguely present and yet action-orienting prem-
ise for developing knowledge. Subsequently, we most often learn about and develop
generalizations without explicitly knowing that we are learning about them and for
what reasons, and yet, these generalizations become constitutive of our actions, of
how we contribute to knowledge creation.
Vaguely present generalizations are thus constitutive of directing human mental
activity and action processes, potentially in both technically and emancipatorily
relevant ways: Such knowledge can be of technical relevance in that it may reveal
possible practical-technical steps, or a method, of becoming able to consciously
actualize imagined realities; and it can simultaneously be of emancipatory rele-
vance, in that it may supersede the immediate circumstances of an actualization’s
practical-technical feasibility and give an idea of whether and how these imagined
realities may be or become livable. The potentiality of vaguely present generaliza-
tions, however, can only be enacted by acknowledging the societal significance of
imagination, i.e., the dialectical relation of its technical and emancipatory relevance.
This acknowledgment would render it possible to imagine the concrete, everyday
improvement of present and future life circumstances and societal arrangements
also by conceptually synthetizing means that cannot (yet) be fathomed.5 This latter,
as I would term it, magical-realist aspect of imagination, as generalizing the not-
yet-present on the grounds of what we may not have directly experienced to know
but can somehow vaguely grasp, given human collective knowledge co-creation and
5
It should be noted that imagination does not per definition lead to subjectively meaningful action.
It can also hinder meaningful action and restrict one’s agency (cf. Sieland 2017; Sieland and
Chimirri in press). It is therefore essential to conceptualize its societal significance also in collec-
tive terms.
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 129
thus by relating to other person’s experiences and the sociomaterial world we are
part of, is similarly described by Vygotsky:
Imagination takes on a very important function in human behavior and human develop-
ment. It becomes the means by which a person’s experience is broadened, because he can
imagine what he has not seen, can conceptualize something from another person’s narration
and description of what he himself has never directly experienced. He is not limited to the
narrow circle and narrow boundaries of his own experience but can venture far beyond these
boundaries, assimilating, with the help of his imagination someone else’s historical or
social experience. In this form, imagination is a completely essential condition for almost
all human mental activity. (2004b: 17)
The following case example is intended to show that the pedagogical professionals
that I have encountered during my long-term field studies in one German and two
Danish daycare centers are constantly working with generalizations in order to cre-
ate knowledge together with children. It is to show that the generalizations they
created together with children, colleagues, parents, etc., are dialectical, in that the
staff members work with them as internally related declarative knowledge products
and simultaneously as procedural knowledge processes. The staff-initiated knowl-
edge co-creation praxis highlighted in the example below builds on scientific as
well as everyday concepts, which combine both magical and realist aspects of the
130 N. A. Chimirri
WHOLE and which are of both emancipatory and technical relevance for the mutual
learning processes across children and adults.
Meanwhile, the pedagogical staff is primarily confronted with political, profes-
sional, and scientific discourses that primarily emphasize teaching for children’s
declarative, anhedonic-rationalist and measurable knowledge acquisition as their
work’s foremost goal, discourses that are based on the premise that children’s
knowledges are somehow defective and inferior to that of the pedagogical staff. The
knowledge co-creation that the staff in praxis often initiates and operates with,
including its relative indeterminateness and openness to all participants’ diverse
experiences, knowledges, and relevance structures, is gradually absenced in these
societal discourses and in the documentation products the staff is to use. The conse-
quence is that the indeterminateness or openness of mutual learning processes is
gradually rendered unimaginable and marginalized in institutional everyday life—a
trend further propelled by current digitalization initiatives in the early childhood
sector, which tend to put a major emphasis on pre-defined, goal-oriented learning of
rationalist and representational knowledge. Magical-realist projects like the one to
be described now, which draw on digital devices and representations as support for
(primarily analogue) learning from one another about the world we are together part
of, may thereby become less imaginable in the future—if their societal significance
remains conceptually-practically underdetermined.
The shortly outlined case is a theatrical project that involved all preschool chil-
dren from three different daycare groups in one Danish daycare center. On the
grounds of their hitherto experiences with those children that were to transition to
school in summer 2017, the pedagogical staff came up with the idea to organize and
implement a theatrical stage play that was to be presented to the parents during the
last days of their children’s daycare stay. The preparations took several months,
given that the pedagogues arranged for a frame that allowed the process to unfold
slowly and cooperatively by gradually adding details to the envisioned final prod-
uct: the theater play. Also, they wanted to make use of the digital infrastructure at
hand: the iPads each group had, as well as the media pedagogical support unit the
municipality had founded in order to support the integration of digital devices into
local pedagogical work and everyday life at the daycare centers.
The preschool children were to be involved at every stage of the preparations:
the play itself and its dialogues/script were developed together, and ended up
with enmeshing Vikings, ninjas, knights, and a dragon egg; music clips were to
be chosen and vocally reenacted by the children with assistance from the munici-
pal IT pedagogue; excursions to the city and the countryside were organized in
order for the children to take digital photographs that could be projected onto the
stage as visual, locally situated backdrop; costumes and props were collected
from the various homes, or newly “homemade” especially for this purpose, also
with the help of some of the daycare parents; some of the props were photo-
graphed as well, animated, and integrated into the background projection (for
instance the handcrafted dragon), in order to explicitly interrelate the digital
background with the analogue staging. Some of the preparatory processes were
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 131
In the case of the theater play staged at the daycare center, the dragon egg played the
role of the “MacGuffin”: an object that everybody, Vikings, ninjas, and knights,
craves while it never is fully explained why this is so. But throughout the process of
imagining and crafting this artifact, it has played many other roles as well: the
knowledge that the pedagogical staff and children co-created in relation to the
dragon egg as a potential generalization product was processually re-situated
according to who was involved in discussing it, to what they found to be relevant to
conceptually relate to, across everyday life contexts, including the production stage
the dragon egg was in. Speculatively, it even triggered discussions about how it
relates to a standardized chicken egg.
What this knowledge-situating praxis across participants craved, meanwhile,
was that the pedagogical staff, qua the authority entitled to them as pedagogically
trained adults vis-à-vis the children they have the duty to take care of, decided to
position themselves as symmetrically as they could fathom in the knowledge and
play-production processes with the children, and to keep the imagined end product,
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 133
the theater play, open for renegotiation with the children. This would point to the
above introduced concept of ethical symmetry, in that the pedagogical staff “strate-
gically” decided to depart from a symmetrical positioning, for the children to have
an equal say in influencing the process’ outcome. Based on this strategical under-
standing of ethical symmetry, the “symmetrical” starting point would have been
granted to the children qua the staff’s societal positioning, representing an instru-
mental token gesture to promote the (learning) agenda the staff is politically
expected to increasingly pursue: for instance in order to make the “task” of imple-
menting a theatrical play more attractive for the preschool children and nudge them
to comply with staff instructions, or to minimize nerve-wrecking conflict, or to fur-
ther democratic decision-taking at the daycare center so as to check it off on the
municipality’s evaluation schema. Despite potentially good intentions, children’s
knowledges would herewith have been implicitly reproduced as defective, as less
significant for societal development than the staff’s, as the latter has the possibility
to strategically grant a symmetrical positioning to the children, and not the other
way around.
Actually, however, the pedagogical staff members that I talked to primarily
emphasized that their openness to the children’s influence on the theatrical play’s
products and processes was due to their interest in learning from the children about
their knowledges. The staff wanted to engage in an activity together with the chil-
dren, in which the children’s knowledges could be articulated in many different
ways, through handicraft, drawing, digital editing, programming, singing, acting,
and of course: talking. Such multimodal dialogue made it possible for the pedagogi-
cal staff not only to learn about the children’s interests and capabilities, but also for
the staff to get its own interests and capabilities, as well as their knowledges, chal-
lenged and diversified by the children. They were seeking ethical symmetry not for
strategical reasons (at least not alone), but because, in my interpretation, they
wanted to supersede epistemic asymmetry by acknowledging ontological symmetry,
by acknowledging that they required the children’s alternative knowledges for
developing as human beings by developing their conceptual understandings of
everyday life.
In such a light, then, the dragon egg’s technical-emancipatory relevance for
knowledge co-creation, for the sake of producing the theatrical play in a pedagogi-
cal context, but in particular for mutually learning for everyday life across ages,
across generationed thresholds, only emerges once acknowledging ethical symme-
try as ontological necessity: The emergence of epistemic asymmetry in the encoun-
ter of whatever kind of egg is neither mere “noise” or “mess” in the knowledge
creation process, it should thus never be eliminated from a generalization process;
rather, the concept of a differently shaped and colored, seemingly singular chicken
or dragon egg contributes as a relevant part to the WHOLE, and thus to a more
nuanced, complex, dialectically intrarelated generalization of an egg. This expanded
knowledge may help all of us understand our respective everyday lives better, and
to more purposefully act together on changing everyday life’s societal arrange-
ments. Neither the dragon egg, nor the violet, ball-shaped chicken egg, merely fal-
sify previous understandings of an egg, but they co-create a potentially productive,
134 N. A. Chimirri
The dragon egg example and the pedagogical staff’s openness to letting their own
scientific and everyday knowledges get troubled by the children, described in the
case, is relevant to academically anchored co-research and knowledge co-creation
processes with children and anyone else as well. “Scientific” knowledge creation
also always builds on the researcher’s conduct of everyday life across contexts: the
researcher’s actions and knowledge creation are “part of the weave” (Slunecko
2019; Chimirri et al. 2015), of the conjointly created fabric of everyday life, of relat-
ing everyday concepts and scientific concepts in order to make them relevant to the
researcher himself/herself, as well as to other researchers and all other human
beings. Schraube’s proposed concept of intersubjective, ontological symmetry for
the sake of seeking the general in epistemic asymmetry implies continuously inquir-
ing into one’s own role in the knowledge co-creation process—and of how not only
the researcher, but also of how the research participants including children benefit
from this process and the knowledge products that emerge from it. The researcher
may initiate an inquiry on the grounds of her own respective epistemic ambition and
knowledge interests, and of an imagined, temporary end product to the inquiry (an
article, a monograph, a conference presentation, etc.). But these must remain open
to processual renegotiation with the participants’ knowledges, their ambitions and
interests, their vaguely generalized end products.
Research that truly acknowledges ethical-ontological symmetry in order to
embrace and mutually learn from epistemic asymmetry requires, I propose, teleoge-
netic collaboration (Chimirri 2015b, 2016, 2019)6: an ongoing dialogue about
6
The concept of teleogenetic collaboration is strongly inspired by Axel’s (2011) concept of conflic-
tual cooperation, as well as by Valsiner’s (2014) following proposition: “Human beings are not
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 135
where our knowledge co-creation processes may be taking us, about what we deem
relevant to pursue according to our diversely imagined, temporary end products of
the generalization processes we engage together in. This process necessarily chal-
lenges the researcher’s own pre-understandings, his ideological worldview (Teo
2009: 42), including the researcher’s potential view of science and scientific con-
cepts as detached from everyday concepts. What we consider to be “real” must be
able to get troubled by what we consider “magical” or fantastic, of what we may
consider to be “defective” at first glance: the magical aspects of everyday life are
just as much a significant part of reality, of the WHOLE, as other generalizations
are, and must therefore be made an explicit part of any research process, of its
knowledge co-creation, be it academically institutionalized or not.
This proposition is itself a generalization, a knowledge product that emerged
from the knowledge co-creation processes that I experienced together with the chil-
dren and the pedagogical staff at the daycare centers I participated in. It describes a
single case that will be re-situated in relation to the reader’s knowledge creation
processes, if conceptually deemed of technical and emancipatory relevance to her.
It can thereby contribute to other generalizations as parts of the WHOLE, though
without knowing for sure how it will be generalized by the reader, who is in turn
part of the knowledge co-creation that may follow from writing this chapter. Any
single case is thus significant in order to more meaningfully conceive of everyday
life beyond the single case, as Valsiner explains:
Not only is generalization from the single case possible – but it is the only possible base for
generalization. And even more – generalization necessarily happens on the basis of a single
instance—each and every new experience – within the life space of the single case. This
claim follows from the biological limit of all living systems functioning in irreversible time.
We live through encountering ever-new unique instances of relating with our environments.
We take singular risks – here and now – once – yet with consequences for the whole of the
life course that follows. While being led by the uniqueness of each moment in life, we oper-
ate through general principles that transcend the uniqueness of any of these moments.
Generalization is possible from any single instance of our encounters with the environment.
Generality is in singularity. (2015: 233–234)
Scientific research and all other forms of generating generalized knowledge serve
living and its experienced uniqueness, its singularity—and not mere survival.
Acknowledging an ethical-ontological symmetry across human beings, irrespective
of age, can be regarded as a precondition for being able to co-explore epistemic
asymmetry and thus inquire into different generalized conceptualizations of what it
may mean to live. To approach a more generally relevant understanding of a pur-
poseful directedness for living in the world together, meanwhile, everyone must be
willing to listen, stay curious, receptive, and responsible—also to the non-verbal
sociomaterial aspects of communication (Chimirri 2016). Otherwise, it all comes
down to “who can yell the loudest” or “strike hardest” in order to establish a fellow,
acting teleologically—by orientation to some future goals, but teleogenetically. They create their
own goal-orientations for the future as they move toward their immediate future states, turning
those into the passing presents” (p. 15x).
136 N. A. Chimirri
References
Eßer, F., & Sitter, M. (2018). Ethische Symmetrie in der partizipativen Forschung mit Kindern.
Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung/Forum: Qualitative Social Research, 19(3), Art 21. https://
doi.org/10.17169/fqs-19.3.3120.
Eßer, F., Baader, M. S., Betz, T., & Hungerland, B. (Eds.). (2016). Reconceptualising agency and
childhood: New perspectives in childhood studies. London: Routledge.
Højholt, C., & Kousholt, D. (2019). Practice cooperation and mutual learning processes: On devel-
oping knowledge through cooperation and participation. Annual Review of Critical Psychology,
17. Retrieved from https://discourseunit.com/annual-review/.
Holzkamp, K. (2013). The development of critical psychology as a subject science. In E. Schraube
& U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint of the subject: Selected writings of
Klaus Holzkamp (pp. 28–45). Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Ingold, T. (2011). Being alive: Essays on movement, knowledge and description. London:
Routledge.
Juhl, P. (2018). Early childhood education and care in Denmark: The contested issue of qual-
ity in children’s everyday lives. In S. Garvis, S. Phillipson, & H. Harju-Luukkainen (Eds.),
International perspectives on early childhood education: Early childhood education in the 21st
century (Vol. 1, pp. 42–53). London: Routledge.
Kontopodis, M. (2012). Neoliberalism, pedagogy and human development: Exploring time, medi-
ation and collectivity in contemporary schools. New York: Routledge.
Law, J. (2007). Making a Mess with Method1. In W. Outhwaite & S. P. Turner (Eds.), The SAGE
Handbook of Social Science Methodology (p. 595–606). London: Sage.
Mannion, G. (2010). After participation: The socio-spatial performance of intergenerational
becoming. In B. Percy-Smith & N. Thomas (Eds.), A handbook of children and young people’s
participation (pp. 330–342). London: Routledge.
Nielsen, K., & Klitmøller, J. (2017). Blinde pletter i den synlige læring: Kritiske kommentarer til
‘Hattierevolutionen’. Nordic Studies of Education, 37(1), 3–18.
Nissen, M. (2009). Objectification and prototype. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 6(1–2),
67–87.
Otterstad, A., & Braathe, H. (2016). Travelling inscriptions of neo-liberalism in Nordic early child-
hood: Repositioning professionals for teaching and learnability. Global Studies of Childhood,
6(1), 80–97.
Salamon, A. (2015). Ethical symmetry in participatory research with infants. Early Child
Development and Care, 185(6), 1016–1030.
Schraube, E. (2013). First-person perspective and sociomaterial decentering: Studying technology
from the standpoint of the subject. Subjectivity, 6(1), 12–32.
Sieland, S. S. (2017). What is “absent” in drug engagements? In Imagination and the digital every-
day living of young people with active drug use (PhD thesis). Roskilde: Roskilde University.
Sieland, S. S., & Chimirri, N. A. (in press). The imaginative in the concrete: How action is pre-
mised on emerging hopes and potentiality. In T. Valério, A. C. Bastos, & L. Tateo (Eds.), From
dream to action: Imagination and (im)possible futures. Charlotte, NC: Information Age.
Sikder, S., & Fleer, M. (2015). “Small science”: Infants and toddlers experiencing science in
everyday family life. Research in Science Education, 45(3), 445–464.
Slunecko, T. (2019). Tracking One’s Own Path – a Methodological Leitmotif of Cultural
Psychology. Integrative Psychological and Behavioral Science
Spyrou, S. (2018). Disclosing childhoods: Research and knowledge production for a critical child-
hood studies. London: Palgrave Macmillan.
Stith, I., & Roth, W.-M. (2006). Who gets to ask the questions: The ethics in/of cogenerative dia-
logue praxis. Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung/Forum Qualitative Social Research, 7(2), Art
38. https://doi.org/10.17169/fqs-10.1.1242.
Teo, T. (2009). Philosophical concerns in critical psychology. In D. Fox, I. Prilleltensky, &
S. Austin (Eds.), Critical psychology: An introduction (pp. 36–53). London: Sage.
Tisdall, E., & Punch, S. (2012). Not so ‘new’? Looking critically at childhood studies. Children’s
Geographies, 10(3), 249–264.
7 Generalizing Together with Children: The Significance of Children’s Concepts… 139
Valsiner, J. (2014). Cultural psychology and its future: Complementarity in a new key. In B. Wagoner,
N. Chaudhary, & P. Hviid (Eds.), Cultural psychology and its future: Complementarity in a new
key (pp. 3–30). Charlotte, NC: Information Age.
Valsiner, J. (2015). Generalization is possible only from a single case (and from a single instance):
The value of a personal diary. In B. Wagoner, N. Chaudhary, & P. Hviid (Eds.), Integrating expe-
riences: Body and mind moving between contexts (pp. 233–243). Charlotte, NC: Information
Age.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1966). Play and its role in the mental development of the child. Soviet Psychology,
3, 6–18.
Vygotsky, L. S. (2004a). Introduction: The fundamental problems of defectology. In R. W. Rieber
& D. K. Robinson (Eds.), The essential Vygotsky (pp. 153–175). Dordrecht: Kluwer.
Vygotsky, L. S. (2004b). Imagination and creativity in childhood. Journal of Russian and East
European Psychology, 42(1), 7–97.
Wallace, D. F. (2006/1996). Infinite jest (10th anniversary paperback edition). New York: Back
Bay Books.
Wartofsky, M. W. (1979). Models: Representation and the scientific understanding. Dordrecht:
Reidel.
Chapter 8
Caravaggio’s The Seven Works of Mercy
and the Art of Generalization
Luca Tateo
L. Tateo (*)
Pós-graduação em Ensino, Filosofia e História das Ciências, Federal University of Bahia,
Salvador, Brazil
Department of Communication and Psychology, Aalborg University, Aalborg, Denmark
traits. The process of generalization starts from everyday experiencing and, through
what I call a zone of potential estrangement, it must be able to return to experience
improving our understanding of it. In other words, as Caravaggio does in his paint-
ings, we must be able to create specimen by abductively distancing from the single
case, and be able to find back the single case using the specimen to understand.
Caravaggio in Naples
Michelangelo Merisi from Caravaggio (born 1571 in Milan, dead 1610 in Porto
Ercole) was actually a fugitive when he arrived in Naples during the autumn of
1606. Just few month before, he was living in Rome as one of the most sought-after
emerging artists, working in the massive renewal of the town started by Pope Sixtus
V. Caravaggio used to spend his free time from painting in the brothels, taverns, and
alleys around the (in)famous Campo De’ Fiori, where he frequented the prostitutes,
gamblers, ordinary laborers, and beggars that he would later cast as saints and wit-
nesses in his most religious paintings. But the night of May 28, 1606, in Campo
Marzio, Caravaggio was involved in a street fight over a wager on a tennis match,
during which he was wounded, but stabbed and killed in return a man known as
captain Ranuccio Tomassoni. Merisi had to start a long wandering to avoid the
arrest and the following sentence to death by default. The first stop was actually
Naples, where he was courted by the Neapolitan aristocracy and welcomed by the
local painters, as his fame was already Europe-wide.
Soon after his arrival, he executed an altarpiece for the Church of Pio Monte
della Misericordia, a painting that would depict the Seven Works (or Acts) of Mercy:
clothing the naked, visiting the ill and imprisoned, giving food to the hungry and
drink to the thirsty, sheltering the traveler and burying the dead (Fig. 8.1).
Let’s try to take for a while the perspective of the painter in the moment he cre-
ated this masterpiece. Caravaggio was going through one of the most tragic periods
of his life. Just few months before he was one of the most celebrated artists in Rome.
Cardinals, religious orders, and nobles where fascinated by his creativity, though
keeping a very ambivalent feeling towards his art (Christiansen 1977). Caravaggio
was an innovator, as he started to practice painting from live models (in Italian: “dal
naturale ritratto”) in resemblance to the studio photography at the beginning of this
art form (Christiansen 1977; Sontag 1977). From time to time, some of his works
were eventually rejected by the religious buyers because his peculiar way of repre-
senting saints and gods using live laypeople models. For instance, his Madonna and
Child with St. Anne (so called in Italian Dei Palafrenieri) (Fig. 8.2), painted right
before leaving Rome, was initially destined to the altar of confraternity of the Papal
Grooms (Italian: Arciconfraternita di Sant’Anna de Parafrenieri) (Bologna 2005).
The naturalistic and humble representation of the figures—including the Virgin
Mary who looks like a woman of the people, St. Anne like an old woman of humble
origins and the “natural” appearance of the young Christ—eventually shocked and
scandalized the buyers. The painting was in fact soon removed from the chapel and
8 Caravaggio’s The Seven Works of Mercy and the Art of Generalization 143
Fig. 8.1 Caravaggio—
Seven works of Mercy
(1607, Pio Monte della
Misericordia, Naples)
(https://commons.
wikimedia.org/wiki/
File:The_Seven_Works_
of_Mercy-Caravaggio_
(1607).jpg. All images in
this chapter fall under fair
use commons license (see
https://commons.
wikimedia.org/wiki/
Commons:Reusing_
content_outside_
Wikimedia))
Fig. 8.2 Caravaggio—
Madonna and Child with
St. Anne (1605–1606,
Galleria Borghese, Rome)
(https://commons.
wikimedia.org/w/index.
php?curid=509486)
a continuum with the outside everyday life and the church. The large canvas is
indeed hanging beyond the main altar:
With its teeming composition set in a nocturnal streetscape, the altarpiece may make you
feel as if the cyclonic street life of the city has somehow followed you inside the church.
(Prose 2007: 86)
Entering the main church door, one can see the large canvas in front, mirroring
the outside alley. Moving down right the canvas, we can see a second group of two
figures that illustrates two themes in one: visiting imprisoned and giving food to the
hungry (Fig. 8.4).
We can see a young woman visiting an imprisoned old man and giving him milk
from her own breast through the prison’s bars. Also in this case, Caravaggio chose
to represent Christian virtues in an unusual way, by alluding to a classical pagan
ancient Roman story of Caritas (Charity): the legend of Pero, a plebeian woman,
who secretly breastfed her father, Cimon, as he was incarcerated and sentenced to
146 L. Tateo
death by starvation. The story says that when Pero was found out by a jailer, her act
of piety and selflessness impressed officials and won her father’s release. Also in
this scene, the painter chose a stunning realism, almost incestuous as in the Baroque
tradition, enhanced by some details like the drop of milk fallen on Cimon’s beard.
Moving to the left of the canvas, we can see another group of figures, which
represents three acts: clothing the naked, visiting the ill, and sheltering the traveler
(Fig. 8.5).
Caravaggio interprets the legend of Saint Martin, who is represented with the
clothes of a rich Spanish gentleman of the seventeenth century in the act of sharing
his coat with a poor beggar, who is also the sick to be visited. Right beyond the
couple, we can see two other male figures: one is a pilgrim, as indicated by the shell
of the Camino de Santiago on his dress, while the other is pointing somewhere on
the left outside the canvas, probably in direction of a hostel.
As we move little up on the left, we can see the act of drinking to the thirsty
(Fig. 8.6). The artist chose another unusual representation: Samson drinks water
from the jawbone of an ass, referring to a story contained into the Book of Judges
of the Hebrew Bible.
The final group of figures occupies the central top part of the canvas. Caravaggio
portraits the Virgin Mary with young Jesus Christ and two angels (black and white).
8 Caravaggio’s The Seven Works of Mercy and the Art of Generalization 147
Fig. 8.7 Detail: Mary, Christ, and the angels, Caravaggio—Seven works of Mercy (1607, Pio
Monte della Misericordia, Naples) (https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Sette_opere_di_
Misericordia_-_Madonna_col_Bambino_e_angeli.jpg)
8 Caravaggio’s The Seven Works of Mercy and the Art of Generalization 149
Everyday Life?
The interest of the psychology of everyday life is in the interplay between the ordi-
nary and the extraordinary, production and reproduction, and between continuity
and discontinuity (Højholt and Schraube 2016). My first question is: in this sense,
does Caravaggio represent everyday life? In the Seven Works of Mercy, it is quite
evident how the artist used the direct observation of everyday life in the streets of
Naples to depict the very abstract concepts of the seven Catholic precepts. His beg-
gars, priests, saints, even the angels and the Christ have the faces and the bodies of
everyday people, caught in the context of street life. Their attitude is even more
realistic, as it betrays the astonishment, the ambivalence, the suffering, and the
affectivity of everyday human experience. Such a poetic was quite unusual at that
time, to the extent that it “humanizes” the religious iconography, and takes the
opposite direction of to Catholic Counter Reformation, which promoted a different
ideal fo divinity. It is not a case, indeed, that Caravaggio strongly influenced the
Flemish painters who lived in the Spanish Naples at the time of the Thirty years’
War. Those painters were in fact closer to the way of understanding the relationship
between divinity and everyday life that characterized North European culture
affected by Lutheran Reformation.
So let’s assume that Caravaggio was trying to grasp the “human nature,” a per-
fectly suitable quest at his time, being able to use his method of painting live models
that allowed him to produce a deep analysis of everyday experience by direct obser-
vation. Caravaggio’s portraits are the equivalent of “thick” descriptions in ethno-
methodology, in which the totality and uniqueness of the painted subject emerge in
all their liveliness. In this sense, they can be considered ancestors of portraiture in
qualitative inquiry (Lawrence-Lightfoot and Davis 1997). However, those portraits
become at the same time “types,” to the extent that one can find the very same faces,
attitudes, and gestures in every street of that time. On the other hand, Caravaggio
does not limit himself to depict “psychological” (por)traits in the Seven Works of
Mercy. He created a collective scene in which everyday life meets divinity. The
issue that he was facing was not just how to generalize the uniqueness of human
psyche, but to understand it in its context. Christiansen (1977), in his discussion
about naturalism, comments:
It goes without saying that this approach to painting directly from a model was applicable
only to pictures of a few figures that could be viewed in isolation against a simple back-
ground. Difficulties arose as soon as Caravaggio took up more complicated allegorical
subjects of the sort that could not be resolved by putting a few vine leaves in his or another
model’s hair, a sheet around one shoulder, and a few pieces of fruit on a ledge—as in the
Bacchino Malato (Borghese Gallery). Mancini’s caveat about the inapplicability of paint-
ing large scale compositions from a group of posed models is amply documented in the
massive revisions in the Martyrdom of Saint Matthew, Caravaggio’s first truly large-scale
narrative. How did Caravaggio proceed when confronted with this sort of elaborate compo-
sition? That he had a method, or rather, that he evolved one, is indubitable. (Christiansen
1977: 422)
150 L. Tateo
Specimen
zone of potential estrangement
Everyday experience
Single case observation
I learned, for example, that these portraits did not capture me as I saw myself, that they were
not like looking in the mirror at my reflection. Instead, they seemed to capture my “essence”;
qualities of character and history, some of which I was unaware, some of which I resisted
mightily, some of which felt deeply familiar. But the translation of image was anything but
literal. It was probing, layered, and interpretive. In addition to portraying my image, the
piece expressed the perspective of the artist and was shaped by the evolving relationship
between the artist and me. I also recognized that in searching for the essence, in moving
beyond the surface image, the artist was both generous and tough, skeptical and receptive.
I was never treated or seen as object but always as a person of strength and vulnerability,
beauty and imperfection, mystery and openness. The artist needed to be vigilant in captur-
ing the image but always watchful of my feelings, perspective, and experience. I learned, as
well, that the portraits expressed a haunting paradox of a moment in time and of timeless-
ness. (Lawrence-Lightfoot 2005: 5)
My initial question was: what can we learn from Caravaggio’s art? I have tried to
analyze the process of generalization in the Seven Works of Mercy, trying to iden-
tify the conceptual elements that make this work a specimen of the human condition
of suffering and relieving. From this analysis, I argue that the process of generaliza-
tion is not an inductive-based extension of some features to a larger portion of the
universe we observe (Tateo 2015). It is neither the formulation of a
context-independent and abstract list of traits. If the process of generalization starts
from experiencing, either in everyday life or in exceptional circumstances, once
distanced by it must be able to return to experience improving our understanding of
it. In other words, as Caravaggio does in his paintings, we must be able to create
specimen by abductively distancing from the single case and be able to find back
the single case using the specimen to understand it. This movement of back and
forth, I argue, takes place in the ZPE. Generalizing is neither grouping, selecting, or
extending, but is creating a new form of knowledge. Generalization “is a conceptual
abstraction, establishing meaningful relationships between the parts of a whole”
(Tateo 2013: 534). Generalizing is a reflective act because it distances from the
everyday experience and accesses a higher level of abstraction. It builds a represen-
tation of a process, not of the outcomes, from the existing knowledge and from the
observation of psychological phenomena. Generalizing is also a creative act because
it builds something that was not there before: it constructs a new theory about the
world. Generalizing constitutes an act of interpretation because it implies a
perspective-taking by the observer and a sense-making process. Finally, generaliz-
ing is a mediated process. There is no direct relationship between the phenomeno-
logical data and the conceptual abstraction. This relationship is mediated by a
scientific apparatus and a set of cultural and personal values that affect both the
construction of phenomenological data and the observer’s position. In the case of
art, the mediation is carried out with different means, but the characteristics of the
generalizing movement are similar.
In the case of Caravaggio, the apparatus consists of his technique “dal naturale”
and his theological perspective. In the case of psychology, it consists of the set of
shared practices and concepts, as well as the ethical perspective that every scholar
must be aware of. Generalization is a creation of reflective knowledge that helps to
reflect in return. Once we have identified this process, we can find example of the
ZPE in other contexts and in different times. For instance, we can find similar pro-
cesses in photography (Fig. 8.10).
Almost three centuries later, this very famous photograph by the Dorothea Lange
works on the same process of Caravaggio’s naturalism. The author starts from a live
model, apparently adopting a naturalistic and documentary approach, while turning
the figure into a specimen of a generalizable experience: the migrant mother. At the
same time, this images is historically contextualized in the crisis of the “dust bowl”
of the 1920s in the United States, allowing us in return to better understand the
condition of the real person in that situation. Yet would be naïve to believe that this
8 Caravaggio’s The Seven Works of Mercy and the Art of Generalization 155
since five centuries, is that of being able to understand our fellow human beings as
unique persons in a collectivity, but also to build knowledge about human condition
as a common endeavor.
Acknowledgments This article has been possible, thanks to the project “The administration of
fear: using art to study psycho-social phenomena,” funded by the Danish Agency for Science,
Technology and Innovation, 2016 International Network Programme.
References
Bologna, F. (2005). Caravaggio, the final years (1606-1610). In N. Spinosa (Ed.), Caravaggio: The
final years (pp. 16–47). Naples: Electa Napoli.
Christensen, T. M., & Brumfield, K. A. (2010). Phenomenological designs: The philosophy of
phenomenological research. In C. J. Sheperis, J. S. Young, & M. H. Daniels (Eds.), Counseling
research: Quantitative, qualitative, and mixed methods (pp. 135–150). Upper Saddle River:
Pearson Education.
Christiansen, K. (1977). Caravaggio and “L’esempio davanti del naturale”. The Art Bulletin, 68(3),
421–445.
Højholt, C., & Schraube, E. (2016). Introduction: Toward a psychology of everyday living. In
E. Schraube & C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 1–14).
London: Routledge.
Lawrence-Lightfoot, S. (2005). Reflections on portraiture: A dialogue between art and science.
Qualitative Inquiry, 11(1), 3–15. https://doi.org/10.1177/1077800404270955.
Lawrence-Lightfoot, S., & Davis, J. H. (1997). The art and science of portraiture. San Francisco:
Jossey-Bass.
Meltzer, M. (2000). Dorothea Lange: A photographer’s life. New York: Syracuse University Press.
Pacelli, V. (1977). New Documents concerning Caravaggio in Naples. The Burlington Magazine,
119(897), 819–827 and 829.
Prose, F. (2007). On the trail of Caravaggio. Smithsonian, 37(12), 80–92.
Sontag, S. (1977). On photography. New York: Macmillan.
Tateo, L. (2013). Generalization as creative and reflective act: Revisiting Lewin’s conflict between
Aristotelian and Galileian modes of thought in psychology. Theory & Psychology, 23(4),
518–536.
Tateo, L. (2014). Beyond the self and the environment: The psychological horizon. In K. R.
Cabell & J. Valsiner (Eds.), The catalyzing mind: Beyond models of causality (pp. 223–237).
New York: Springer.
Tateo, L. (2015). The nature of generalization in psychology. In G. Marsico, R. Andrisano
Ruggieri, & S. Salvatore (Eds.), Reflexivity and psychology (pp. 45–64). Charlotte: Information
Age Publishing.
Tateo, L. (2016). Towards a new (psychological) science. In L. Tateo (Ed.), Giambattista Vico and
the new psychological science (pp. 205–218). New Brunswick: Transaction Publishers.
Tateo, L. (Ed.). (2018). An old melody in a new song: Aesthetics and the art of psychology.
New York: Springer.
Tateo, L., & Marsico, G. (2013). The self as tension of wholeness and emptiness. Interacções, 24,
1–19.
Chapter 9
Reproducing the General Through
the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research
move out beyond everyday experiences of hardship and into consideration of the
ways in which broader societal formations take form in everyday lives in adversity.
Accordingly, we approach everyday life as a domain of human interaction where
dynamic facets of people’s lives come together, often in concert with those of peo-
ple around them in ways that reproduce social structures (Hodgetts et al. 2018).
Everyday life is where human experience and action exists simultaneously in per-
sonal and societal life (Holzkamp 1995/2016). The quotidian constitutes a social
realm through which small acts are cumulatively combined to forge inhabited social
environments that manifest broader societal structures. As Dreier (2016: 21) notes:
‘Persons include simple routines in more extensive personal arrangements of their
conduct of everyday life that they establish in relation to the societal arrangements
of everyday social practice’. Personal acts such as turning off a heater to save power,
eating rotten food, or sleeping on the streets take on significance as social practices
through which societal inequalities and marginality are reproduced (Halkier 2011;
Halkier and Jensen 2011). Such practices often enact phronetic or practically ori-
ented, tacit, provisional, malleable, and experiential knowledge that people develop
in response to their own situations of poverty (cf., Flyvbjerg et al. 2012). These
everyday acts can appear insignificant and unremarkable on the surface. It is when
we consider such practices in the context of broader relational configurations that
their societal significance comes to light.
Concisely, supporting the philosophical position that the specific resembles the
general, but is not reducible to it (Simmel 1903/1997), we work to extract general
insights out of detailed considerations of local practices and objects (Davis 1973;
Frisby 1981). Because the general is already entangled within the particular, our
approach is anchored in lived experiences of adversity whilst speaking to the broader
societal aetiology of everyday poverty (Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). Central is a con-
ceptual shift from the specific out towards what Goffman (1963) refers to as the
backstage of social phenomenon. This backstage is populated by intergroup rela-
tionships that drive wealth concentration into the hands of the few at the expense of
growing numbers of people in countries such as New Zealand (Hodgetts and Stolte
2017). We seek to convey insights into particular scenes featuring our participants
in a manner that enables readers to recognise the societal forces at play.
In many respects, we have come to understand this approach as similar to that of
early impressionist painters and earlier impressionist social scientists such as Georg
Simmel (Davis 1973; Frisby 1981). These artists focused on everyday subject mat-
ter and worked to move our gaze with broad strokes from local scenes out to the
social universe at play in situated happenstance. As we work our way out from
experiences of hardship to the broader social structures at play, we also move out
beyond the tendency in ruling psychology to individualise social problems, such as
poverty as magically the product of personal inadequacies. Instead, we locate the
aetiology of poverty primarily in broader dysfunctional intergroup relations that
have been shaped by greed rather than need (Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). Rather than
trying to capture or duplicate a frozen moment plucked from ‘real’ lives, like
impressionist painters we aim to offer readers an overall impression of the dynamics
of everyday poverty. The value of such impressions is not whether or not they
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 159
represent an actual stable reality (assuming for a moment that this might is even
possible). Value resides in offering more affluent audiences who have not experi-
enced poverty themselves, but whose collective actions shape poverty for others,
understandings and insights that enable them to understand and empathise with
people who are living in poverty. In producing such impressions, we move con-
stantly between specific descriptions of a local scene and theoretical abstractions
that afford a means of invoking more general deliberations regarding the impover-
ished situations in which our participants find themselves. The result is an intensi-
fied picture of actuality that is comprised, at least metaphorically of incomplete
brush strokes that hint at, rather than capture everyday poverty.
This chapter exemplifies our developing impressionist orientation in relation to
the use of visual exercises designed to aid our participants in sharing their experi-
ences of poverty with us. These activities are designed to allow participants to
‘show’ and ‘tell’ us about their everyday lives (Hodgetts et al. 2007). Instead, of
viewing the resulting drawings or photographs as hard ‘data’ that conveys set, con-
crete evidence of reality, we view these materials as offering incomplete insights
that often hint at, but never fully capture what everyday poverty is like for people.
We will demonstrate how the mimetic objects produced by our research participants
can be understood as empirically valuable agentive efforts to re-assemble, mimic,
imitate, approximate, partially express and render more tangible their experiences
of hardship and the material ramifications of inequitable social structures (Hodgetts
et al. 2018). In extending our account of impressionistic scholarship, we set out
three interrelated aspects of generalisation.
In this chapter, we approach generalisation as a multi-faceted process made up of
various elements, forms, or dimensions. As such, we present an account of three
forms of generalisation that are central to our research and advocacy work around
issues of societal inequalities and everyday urban poverty. These three forms of
generalisation are not exhaustive. These three are elements of core relevance to our
work that are evident within broader processes of generalisation in research into
everyday life. First, our efforts involve theoretical generalisation or bringing con-
ceptual abstractions to bear as we interpret what participants’ show and tell us about
their experiences of poverty. Second, we explore the broader societal structures and
relationships that shape personal experiences of hardship or what we term referen-
tial generalisation. Third, empathetic generalisation is central to our efforts to culti-
vate compassion among people whose decisions impact the lives of our participants.
All three forms are part of a greater whole that is generalisation.
Theoretical Generalisation
developing new theory from qualitative data and are more about bridging the space
between everyday human experience and broader and existing theoretical debates
and abstractions that populate the academy (cf., Simmel 1903/1997). We draw on
scholarly theory in order to situate and interpret systemically the everyday experi-
ences of poverty with which we are grappling through research. As we recount
below, theoretical generalisation involves bringing images produced by participants
into conversation with existing theoretical abstractions in order to crack these arte-
facts open and to develop our interpretations of depicted events and relationships
(Halkier 2011). For example, such an approach enables us to better comprehend
how neoliberalism, which has been theorised to increase poverty and reduce societal
supports for people in need is reproduced everyday when people try to access wel-
fare services. We also draw on theoretical generalisation to make sense of what
research participants are doing when they attempt to reconstruct and communicate
their experiences of hardship visually during research by drawing on philosophical
concepts such as mimesis (Benjamin 1933/1978, 1982). Whether focused on con-
tent (neoliberalism) or processes of picturing (mimesis), theoretical generalisation
involves (methodologically) adopting the position of the researcher as bricoleur
(Lévi-Strauss 1962) by bringing together insights from everyday experiences with
insights from theory to create new impressions of poverty and its lived implications.
To demonstrate our orientation towards theoretical generalisation, we refer to an
example from a previous research project on urban poverty in Auckland. As part of
the Family100 project (Hodgetts et al. 2014), we asked participants to draw and talk
about the social services they came into contact with over the previous 2 weeks.
Many of the participants drew cluttered service maps. For example, Fig. 9.1 depicts
numerous agencies this participant engaged with, whilst the jagged lines represent
stressful or discordance interactions with many of these organisations. For us, this
image is not simply a dispassionate chart of the everyday interactions of an indi-
vidual in need. The significance of Fig. 9.1 extends beyond the page, as a depiction
of a chaotic and dysfunctional welfare sector, which Wacquant (2009) has theorised
as ‘penal welfare’. This service map illustrates how welfare no longer functions as
a coherent ‘system’. Instead, when positioned as denizens (Bauman 2004), people
facing poverty must navigate a raft of loosely connected agencies that are overly
bureaucratic, punitive, and demanding in orientation towards them (Hodgetts et al.
2014). This often results in a high degree of time wasting and experiences of futility
that add to the stress of poverty (Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). As Hayley states:
It’s the run around. I’m pretty organised and even if you do have…the paperwork that’s
required, there is still one thing they will demand you get… So you’ve got to rebook your
appointment, use up more gas to go and run around, or more money for the buses.
Above, Hayley invokes time wasting as a core activity in everyday scenes where
people attempt to access welfare supports. Typically, in order to access welfare pay-
ments from a government agency people must obtain certification from a budgeter,
even though the government agency already knows what their income is because
they are the one’s paying it. Once this task is completed, a person is then often asked
for additional documentation from sources such as power companies to further
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 161
prove their need for financial assistance. Such tasks all take time, and no money is
forthcoming until all of the required documentation is obtained. It is no surprise
then that participants, such as Hayley, emphasise the emotional strain and futility of
trying to access welfare supports to which they are legally entitled (Hodgetts and
Stolte 2017). They draw and talk openly about the stress, frustration, futility, and
anger they experience in having to weave the various agencies depicted in Fig. 9.1
together to create some semblance of a service landscape for themselves. In a previ-
ous publication, we theorised such relationships between welfare recipients and
agencies using the concept of structural violence (Hodgetts et al. 2014).
Psychological researchers frequently pride themselves on being more objective
than other social science disciplines, by offering a supposedly unbiased account of
the pictures and associated accounts produced by our participants. Yet, such an
approach can limit analyses to description or partitioned cause–effect occurrences.
Instead, we advocate for the need to ‘go beyond your data’ in order develop inter-
pretations of artefacts such as the one featured in Fig. 9.1, which uncover the traces
of the general buried within a particular image or account. Theoretical generalisa-
tion enables us to situate this service map as a starting point for moving beyond a
description of dysfunctional relationships between Hayley and services to interpret-
ing what is going on at an institutional societal level.
We can use theoretical abstractions to cultivate our impressions of the reasons
why the welfare system has become dysfunctional, inhumane, and brutal to people
162 D. Hodgetts et al.
Consideration of their efforts to let us know what is going on also leads to further
abstract and concrete considerations of the increased difficulties surrounding inter-
group communication between people in the city (Hodgetts et al. 2018).
This conceptual orientation is crucial for impressionistic analysis because
memetic objects such as that depicted in Fig. 9.1 remain incomplete and merely hint
at, rather than fully capture what everyday life in poverty is like for someone. It also
enables us to better understand participant difficulties in showing and telling us
about hardship in a society that often blames them for their situations. This, in turn
has led us to consider the dialogical potential of images (Benjamin 1940, 1982), and
how participant picturing practices can render their hardships more tangible for
audiences living very different and more privileged lives. In grappling with similar
theoretical concerns, Benjamin (1940) states:
For what do we know of street corners, curb-stones, the architecture of the pavement - we
who have never felt heat, filth, and the edges of stones beneath our naked soles, and have
never scrutinized the uneven placement of the paving stones with an eye toward bedding
down on them.
Referential Generalisation
Our approach to referential generalisation is, in many respects, based on the asser-
tion that poverty is created within a social world that features dysfunctional inter-
group relations and institutional practices. We also propose that it is important that
we do not detach experiences of poverty from this socio-economic context. To do so
is to risk individualising poverty and engaging in the age-old practice of victim
blaming (Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). As such, referential generalisation involves
efforts to engage with the social universe at play in the situations, people, practices,
and objects the populate participant pictures and accounts of everyday life. Such
generalisation work often begins with engagements with specific artefacts such as
the service diagram in Fig. 9.1. It also involves working with images that partici-
pants may have plucked from other sources such as the internet in order to convey
aspects of their experiences or to render these material and therefore real (see
Fig. 9.2). Such seemingly inanimate objects carry aspects of the broader social
milieu from which they emerge and need to be analysed as such.
Referential generalisation enables us to ground structurally orientated explana-
tions for poverty. We can implicate neoliberal socio-economic systems that have
been set up to service selfish wealth extraction among elites as core causes of soci-
etal inequalities and poverty. The focus here can be on problems such as elite greed
shaping economic and institutional practices in ways that benefit wealthy people,
and at the cost of increased inequalities in society and the resulting hardships expe-
rienced by our participants (Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). In this way, referential gen-
eralisation involves seeking the societal through the local. This is appropriate if one
accepts that: ‘The general content is thus not dissolved into a multitude of empirical
facts but is concretised in a theoretical analysis of a given social configuration and
related to the whole of the historical process of which it is an insolvable part’
(Horkheimer 1941: 22). Through referential generalisation objects such as Figs. 9.1
and 9.2 can be rendered as situational representations (Delmar 2010), which are
useful in grappling with the double articulation of the general in the particular.
Practically, this requires a series of interpretive shifts out from particular artefacts,
Fig. 9.2 GLOW-BUG
power meter
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 165
Greg then invokes the GLOW-BUG to exemplify how his practices of rationing and
vigilance reflect the exacerbation of constants that have come into his home with
this device. The GLOW-BUG is presented as an unwelcome and overly controlling
addition to the household:
You know that you can’t deal with it on GLOW-BUG… It’s just a pre-pay phone card type
of thing… And you put a minimum of 20 bucks, it costs $1.50 to put in every time… If you
get below $11.00 they cut you off… They’ll give you a warning and some stupid lights...
When it’s green, it’s fine. When it’s orange, you’re power’s low. It’s going to be off in two
days. When it turns red your power’s going to be cut off at 12 o’clock… It drives you a little
bit nutty...
Greg pitches his account at the level of everyday experience. He anchors his situa-
tion in relation to the electrical meter, his need for restraint, and the stressful and
unhealthy circumstances in which he resides. Through this account, we can see how
his use of the GLOW-BUG involves much more than a simple consumption prac-
tice. The extent to which this object intrudes on his everyday life is dehumanising in
that the GLOW-BUG regulates lighting, heating, and when householders go to bed.
This household object has become an unwelcome companion that constantly
reminds Greg of the hardships, stress, and anxieties of poverty. Greg’s account also
offers an everyday reference point to step out from in our analysis to consider fur-
ther how his situation came to be.
Our orientation towards referential generalisation attunes us to the GLOW-BUG
being more than an isolated inanimate object in Greg’s home. To understand how
this object and Greg’s practices of restraint came into being, we need to look at the
underlying intergroup and institutional relationships that manifest in his home with
this device. This focus is important because the GLOW-BUG is part of a larger
societal whole. The very existence of the GLOW-BUG comprises more than some
166 D. Hodgetts et al.
In the present context, the GLOW-BUG is a material fingerprint that comes to solid-
ify or materialise aspects of an inequitable social order currently shaping everyday
lives in poverty. The GLOW-BUG exemplifies how, in inequitable and exploitative
societies, wealthy people become implicated in the hardships of less fortunate
citizens.
Ultimately, referential generalisation involves efforts to bridge the personal and
societal in the conduct of everyday life. This approach involves efforts to extend
present knowledge of how the everyday objects and practices that populate people’s
lives reflect broader intergroup relationships in society. This is important because
everyday hardship does not occur in a relational vacuum separate from the rest of
society. Everyday lives in poverty are shaped by the actions of more affluent groups.
As such, we would argue that referential generalisation from artefacts such as the
GLOW-Bug meter allow us to demonstrate how the poverty experienced personally
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 167
Empathetic Generalisation
also resembles aspects of what Fine (2006) has termed provocative generalisability
and Seedat (2017) terms witnessing. For us, this work involves provoking domiciled
readers, for example, to recognise and feel some affinity with the everyday experi-
ences of homeless people, to consider issues of fairness and inequality, and to imag-
ine different responses to homelessness.
In this context, we engage in referential generalisation is a dynamic and engaged
research practice. In one sense, referential generalisation occurs when participants
create memetic objects that establish some recognition of the general common
ground we share as human beings (Delmar 2010) despite our positioning as home-
less participants and domiciled researchers. Through being presented with partici-
pants images of their everyday lives we can come to empathise with them as fellow
human beings with their own stresses and frustrations. As scholar activists, we also
utilise processes of empathetic generalisation in presenting participant images to
decision-makers as part of broader efforts to stimulate the emotional intelligence of
decision-makers. Such action requires a reduction in the social distance between
homeless people and decision-makers through the establishment of some common
ground from which the in-humanity of many punitive responses to homelessness
can be recognised, challenged, and changed. Let us provide a more concrete exam-
ple of such work.
Reflecting the overlapping nature of our three forms of generalisation, we drew
on aspects of theoretical and referential generalisation in our efforts to promote
empathetic generalisation. By way of background to the example to follow, two of
us were asked to speak to a city council about proposed measures to ban homeless
people and regulate how people rendered assistance to them. We wanted to reframe
the conversation by ensuring that our dialogue was informed by the experiences of
participants in our research. This involved presenting simple questions related to the
everyday practices that populate homeless lifeworlds and then showing homeless
people doing these ‘normal’ things in extraordinary situations (see Fig. 9.3). The
point of this exercise was to disrupt a punitive mind-set that was dominating official
narratives at the time and to enable these decision-makers to recognise homeless
people as human beings. We did this through depictions of them doing the very
things we all do each day, which the audience would likely recognise.
Our effort as scholar activists involved the use of the materials presented in
Fig. 9.3 to lobby city councillors when they considered a ban on homeless people
from the Auckland CBD.
The questions and pictures in Fig. 9.3 worked together much like music and lyr-
ics to promote a shared emotional experience that is somewhat unique to each mem-
ber of the audience. More broadly, these materials functioned to retexture the
meeting space from a setting for planned exclusion to a setting for human inclusion
in response to homelessness. The use of these questions and images worked to build
a sense of familiarity and recognition that reduced the social distance between the
city council audience and the homeless people depicted. This involved using partici-
pant pictures of homeless people engaging in the same everyday practices of sleep-
ing, eating, and socialising as members of the city council audience. The difference
is that homeless people engage in these domestic practices in public spaces.
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 169
Fig. 9.3 Questions and images from a workshop with city councillors
170 D. Hodgetts et al.
To sonder requires a person slowing down and take more time to think about people
affected by issues such as homelessness, and in ways that render homeless people
more familiar and socially close. In cultivating sonder, we worked to promote in our
city council audience a sense of shared humanity towards urban strangers, from
which humane responses could be developed. In the context of scholarly consider-
ations of generalisation, our promotion of Sonder epitomises the centrality of issues
of praxis and action, and efforts to improve the everyday circumstances of people
living in poverty. This exemplar also demonstrates how small acts that cultivate
empathy, recognition, and witnessing through the creative use of visual research
artefacts can have larger and positive consequences for people on the margins of
society.
To be clear, we do not see such efforts at promoting sonder and empathy building
as solely individual level interventions. We also engage in efforts to build empathy
through a range of media advocacy activities (Hodgetts and Chamberlain 2014)
designed to contribute to the reshaping of the broader structure of feeling (Williams
1977) in society that shape institutional responses to poverty and homelessness.
This broader focused work also involves using participant pictures to re-humanise
people in need and to increase understandings of the structural causes of poverty
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 171
among more affluent groups in society. This is important because how populations
and governmental organizations understand poverty often shapes how they respond.
For example, if poverty is seen as resulting from personal laziness then responses
often adopt a penal approach to welfare that targets laziness using a raft of punitive
technologies of control (Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). Conversely, when poverty is
seen as the result of structural inequalities that benefit a few affluent people at the
expense of many other people of more modest means, then the targets of change can
be shifted to social structures.
Our efforts to promote sonder and empathy at individual, institutional, and soci-
etal levels have synergies with recent work by Seedat (2017) on the centrality of a
dialectical humanistic ethos in South African psychology and society. This involves
embracing notions of witnessing, emotional immediacy, consciousness raising, and
social justice. Also central to Seedat’s (2017) approach to developing more humane
and engaged approaches is the enabling of people to see themselves again “…as
caring and compassionate social actors…” (p. 523). For us, such work also involves
developing human-centred ways of knowing poverty and homelessness that seek to
challenge the inequitable social structures that shape the everyday lives of people
affected.
Conclusion
This chapter has drawn on insights from several research projects exploring urban
poverty and homelessness in partnership with the people concerned (Hodgetts et al.
2011, 2014, 2016a, b; Hodgetts and Stolte 2017). A core goal in this chapter has
been to exemplify our evolving approach to researching poverty in everyday life and
beyond. Our impressionistic orientation is designed to enable us to link structural
changes in society with the hurt and hardships experienced in a growing number of
daily lives. Central to this approach is the assemblage of a series of fleeting glimpses
produced by research participants into an impression of a larger social totality.
Drawing insights from seminal scholars of social life, including Georg Simmel,
Walter Benjamin, Marie Jahoda, and Max Horkheimer, we have explored the
broader societal significance of the scenes, experiences, and relationships invoked
by our participants through careful reflections on these fragments of everyday life.
Like impressionist painters, we explore the general or societal through the particular
or everyday (Davis 1973; Horkheimer 1941; Simmel 1903/1997). This approach
enables us to see hardship and homelessness as fundamentally relational elements
of history and the present social milieu.
In adopting an impressionist orientation, we are intentionally breaking from rule
governed approaches to qualitative research such as discourse analysis, grounded
theory, and thematic analysis. Proponents of these approaches have dominated dis-
cussions of qualitative research in psychology. Such qualitative approaches have
also become very popular, in part, because they offer the illusion of certainty through
procedure that is very familiar to psychologists. These approaches do offer a set of
172 D. Hodgetts et al.
procedures for beginning scholars to ‘learn how to do analysis’ and to develop less
tangible tricks of the trade (Becker 1998). However, such approaches can also stifle
creativity and reduce social analysis to a highly governed set of procedures. Central
to these more established approaches—which in many respects constitute a salon of
qualitative research in psychology—is the assumption that if one follows set proce-
dures rigorously and employs ‘the correct steps’ then one can generate a plausible
and in some cases even replicable analysis. We do not share this worldview.
Rather than conducting micro-analyses of specific visual or verbal texts follow-
ing a rigid set of coding strategies, our impressionistic analyses rely on our own
experiences, creativity, instincts, and humanity of scholars. Our approach embraces
the need for scholars to develop as virtuosos who are less rule governed (Flyvbjerg
2006). It necessitates following hunches more than someone else’s recipe for analy-
sis. This is why we have not outlined detailed procedures for producing an impres-
sionistic analysis. We have also resisted offering a recipe for analysis because far
from constituting a set result, the impressions we construct of everyday poverty
remain incomplete, partial, and open to further interpretation and development.
In addition to focusing on the substantive issue of poverty, we have also focused
on issues relating to the communicability of everyday experiences of adversity. We
have illustrated how research participants experiencing poverty actively reconstruct
and invoke hard and emotionally textured everyday experiences that remain entan-
gled within the grim actuality of being homeless or without sufficient funds to heat
and dry one’s modest dwelling. In order to help us understand what poverty is like,
our participants provide creatively adulterated metonymic artefacts that come to
resemble and stand in for their situations and experiences in general (cf., Benjiman
1933/1978, 1940/2002, 1982). These objects offer selected slithers of everyday life-
worlds that point to, but can never fully capture experiences of poverty.
Correspondingly, we must go beyond viewing these artefacts as discrete units of
data that hold set meanings in order to explore the structural and intergroup ele-
ments of poverty today. We move from these artefacts to consider the influence of
more affluent groups in society in intensifying hardships enacted by people living in
poverty. Along the way, our approach to such materials positions our participants as
artisans in their own right who create memetic objects to render their experiences a
little more tangible to us. This is also because for us poverty research is not simply
a spectator sport. Central to efforts to generalise from what participants’ show and
tell us are our efforts to encourage different audiences to recognise the appropriate-
ness of humane, understanding and inclusive responses to the human misery that
comes with societal inequalities, poverty and homelessness.
Briefly, our approach involves developing impressions that gain broader rele-
vance when we shift our gaze out beyond the experiential level of daily living and
onto the socio-economic relations that suffuse local settings. This is a crucial inter-
pretive shift that can reveal the threads of inequitable relations that are entangled
within the everyday lives of our participants (Hodgetts et al. 2014). Such an approach
is particularly applicable to psychological scholarship on the conduct of everyday
life, which asserts that human action exists simultaneously in both personal and
communal life (Hodgetts et al. 2018). As scholars of the quotidian, we see our role
9 Reproducing the General Through the Local: Lessons from Poverty Research 173
References
Bauman, Z. (2004). Wasted lives. Modernity and its outcasts. Cambridge: Polity.
Becker, H. (1998). Tricks of the trade. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Benjamin, W. (1933/1978). On the mimetic faculty. In Reflections: Essays, aphorisms, autobio-
graphical writings (E. Jephcott, Trans.) (pp. 333–336). New York: Schocken.
Benjamin, W. (1940/2002). The arcades project (H. Eiland & K. McLaughlan, Trans.). Cambridge:
Harvard University Press.
Benjamin, W. (1982). Illuminations (H. Zohn, Trans.). London: Fontana.
Davis, M. (1973). Georg Simmel and the aesthetics of social reality. Social Forces, 51(3), 320–329.
Delmar, C. (2010). “Generalizability” as recognition: Reflections on a foundational problem in
qualitative research. Qualitative Studies, 1, 115–128.
Dreier, O. (2016). Conduct of everyday life: Implications for critical psychology. In E. Schraube &
C. Hojholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 15–33). London: Routledge.
Fine, M. (2006). Bearing witness: Methods for researching oppression and resistance—A textbook
for critical research. Social Justice Research, 19(1), 83–108.
Flyvbjerg, B. (2006). Five misunderstandings about case-study research. Qualitative Inquiry, 12,
219–145.
Flyvbjerg, B., Landman, T., & Schram, S. (2012). Real social science: Applied phronesis.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Frisby, D. (1981). Sociological impressionism: A reassessment of Georg Simmel’s social theory.
London: Heinemann.
Goffman, I. (1963). Behavior in public places: Notes on the social organisation of gatherings.
New York: Free Press.
Halkier, B. (2011). Methodological practices in analytical generalisation. Qualitative Inquiry, 17,
787–797.
Halkier, B., & Jensen, I. (2011). Methodological challenges in using practice theory in consump-
tion research. Journal of Consumer Culture, 11, 101–123.
Heidegger, M. (1927/1962). Being and time (J. Macquarrie & E. Robinson, Trans.). London: SCM
Press.
Hodgetts, D., & Chamberlain, K. (2014). Chapter 26: Analysing news media. In U. Flick (Ed.),
Sage handbook of qualitative data analysis. London: Sage.
Hodgetts, D., & O’Doherty, K. (2018). Introduction to applied social psychology. In K. O’Doherty
& D. Hodgetts (Eds.), Sage handbook of applied social psychology. London: Sage.
Hodgetts, D., & Stolte, O. (2017). Urban poverty and health inequalities: A relational approach.
London/New York: Routledge.
Hodgetts, D., Chamberlain, K., & Radley, A. (2007). Considering photographs never taken during
photo-production project. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 4, 263–280.
174 D. Hodgetts et al.
Hodgetts, D., Drew, N., Stoltie, O., Sonn, C., Nikora, N., & Curtis, C. (2010). Social psychology
and everyday life. Houndmills, Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Hodgetts, D., Stolte, O., Radley, A., Groot, S., Chamberlain, K., & Leggatt-Cook, C. (2011). ‘Near
and far’: Social distancing in domiciled characterizations of homeless people. Urban Studies,
48, 1739–1753.
Hodgetts, D., Chamberlain, K., Groot, S., & Tankel, Y. (2014). Urban poverty, structural violence
& welfare provision for 100 families in Auckland. Urban Studies, 51, 2036–2051.
Hodgetts, D., Groot, S., Garden, E., & Chamberlain, K. (2016a). The precariat, everyday life &
objects of despair. In C. Howarth & E. Andreouli (Eds.), Everyday politics. London: Palgrave.
Hodgetts, D., Groot, S., Chamberlain, K., & Gardener, E. (2016b). Debt in the everyday lives of
100 families experiencing urban poverty in New Zealand. In C. Walker & S. Degirmencioglu
(Eds.), Social and psychological dimensions of personal debt and the debt industry. London:
Palgrave Macmillan.
Hodgetts, D., Stolte, O., Groot, S., & Drew, N. (2018). Homelessness, mimesis and the flânerie.
International Perspectives in Psychology, 7, 91–106.
Holzkamp, K. (1995/2016). Conduct of everyday life as a basic concept of critical psychology.
In E. Schraube & C. Hojholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 65–98).
London: Routledge.
Horkheimer, M. (1941). Notes on institute activities. Studies in Philosophy and Social Science, 9,
121–123.
Jahoda, M. (1992). Reflections on Marienthal and after. Journal of Occupational and Organizational
Psychology, 65, 355–358.
Jahoda, M., Lazarsfeld, P., & Zeisel, H. (1933/1971). Marienthal: A sociography of an unem-
ployed community. London: Tavistock.
Koenig, J. (2014). The dictionary of obscure sorrows. Retrieved March 13, 2018, from https://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=AkoML0_FiV4
Lévi-Strauss, C. (1962). The savage mind. Chicago: University of Chicago.
Miller, D. (2010). Stuff. Cambridge: Polity Press.
Seedat, M. (2017). Psychology and humanism in the democratic South African Imagination. South
Africa Journal of Psychology, 47, 520–530.
Simmel, G. (1900/1978/2004). The philosophy of money (D. Frisby, Trans.). London: Routledge.
Simmel, G. (1903/1997). The metropolis and mental life. In D. Frisby and M. Featherstone (Eds.),
Simmel on Culture: Selected Writings (pp.174–187). London: Sage.
Standing, G. (2011). The precariat: The new dangerous class. London: Bloomsbury.
Strauss, A., & Corbin, J. (1994). Grounded theory methodology. In N. K. Denzin & Y. S. Lincoln
(Eds.), Handbook of qualitative research (pp. 217–285). Thousand Oaks: Sage.
Wacquant, L. (2009). The body, the ghetto and the penal state. Qualitative Sociology, 32, 101–129.
Watkins, M., & Shulman, H. (2008). Toward psychologies of liberation. London: Palgrave
Macmillan.
Williams, R. (1977). Marxism and literature. Oxford: Oxford.
Part III
Transformative Lines of Situated
Generalization
Chapter 10
Generalizations in Situated Practices
Ole Dreier
The chapter addresses basic issues about generalization from the perspective of
Critical Psychology. It is framed by a critical analysis of the mainstream notion of
generalization in psychology because psychologists are educated in this notion and
constantly confronted with it in the research literature and in discussions, reviews,
and evaluations of their work. This complicates the development of an alternative
notion of generalization which does not, implicitly or explicitly, take over key fea-
tures of the mainstream notion. The purpose of the chapter is to present such an
alternative conception of generalization in Critical Psychology by focusing on its
key characteristics, accomplishments, issues, and revisions. Human beings are theo-
rized as participants in structurally arranged, situated social practices. Their psycho-
logical processes unfold in, and hang together with, their participation and conduct
of everyday life in such social practices. So, their psychological processes are
always affected by being directed at and part of situated nexuses in subjects’ lives in
social practices. We must, therefore, generalize about subjects’ psychological func-
tioning in situated nexuses. But, while it is necessary to establish generalizations in
capturing concrete nexuses, it cannot be the sole purpose of research. We must
capture how general and particular aspects hang together dynamically in nexuses
and how their situated composition affects the qualities and status of the aspect or
problem we study. Case studies offer unique possibilities for accomplishing this
which is briefly illustrated by an example. It is, finally, argued that grasping phe-
nomena and problems in situated nexuses of social practice is necessary in basic
theorizing as well as in knowledge-based expertise and professional interventions in
subjects’ problems in the nexuses of their everyday lives. Like most discussions on
generalization, this chapter focuses on empirical generalization though critical
issues about conceptual and theoretical generalization also need to be addressed.
O. Dreier (*)
Department of Psychology, University of Copenhagen, Copenhagen, Denmark
e-mail: ole.dreier@mail.dk
or not by comparing their scopes and reasons with those captured in the type. Such
comparisons may broaden and develop their knowledge of self and others and guide
their ways of living and dealing with various issues. Still, individual members of a
type are not identical. They are more or less similar cases of a typical scope of pos-
sibilities grouped due to widespread commonalities but different in other respects.
The generalization of a type is an approximation and our knowledge of individual
subjects is skewed and abstract if we only consider the commonalities but not the
differences.
Any kind of generalization requires a basic frame of comparison. In mainstream
psychology, it is a population with general means on isolated variables whereas, to
Holzkamp, the overall social structure is the general frame in relation to which com-
monalities and differences are defined. Individual subjects on similar positions in
the overall structure then face similar scopes of possibilities mediated by it. And
individual subjects in similar local situations associated with a social position face
similar scopes of possibilities mediated by it. Holzkamp holds a nested view of
social structure in which individual subjects are grasped as affected by and address-
ing the overall social structure in position-specific and locally mediated ways. But,
as we move closer to individual subjects in particular situations, the analysis
becomes more complex and the approximation becomes looser or holds fewer
members.
In his early work on sensory knowledge, Holzkamp (1973: 268) states that indi-
vidual subjects may perceive phenomena as they appear in their immediate situation
or comprehend how these phenomena are mediated by the social structure. Individual
knowledge then involves a crucial move beyond the appearances in the immediate
situation and critical reflection—in comprehending the essential connections and
totality—is a necessary step towards knowledge. The immediacy of situated percep-
tion is superficial, illusory, and uncritical and distance is a requirement for compre-
hension. But comprehending the overall structure is a wide-ranging affair and hard
to define in its totality—especially as an individual accomplishment. To Holzkamp,
any local grasp of the overall structure is partial because it is afforded by a particular
location and perspective on the social structure. The particular aspects visible in the
situated perspective on the social structure refer to a comprehensive totality beyond
the situated grasp. The situated perspective must then be complemented by other
views from other locations. In passing, Holzkamp mentions that changes of loca-
tion—through the subject’s activities and/or movements of the objects of knowl-
edge—may increase the adequacy of knowledge.
While Holzkamp insists on grasping a local situation by capturing its mediation
through common features in a social structure, its other local sources and aspects
and its particular composition fall out of focus. This is the drawback of the require-
ment for distancing in obtaining knowledge. But if the local sources are not
involved in obtaining knowledge, it becomes, strictly speaking, impossible to show
that the overall mediated aspects are most important in local situations. They must
be assumed to be so. And their particular, local status and meaning cannot be deter-
mined without studying their situated meaning in the composition of the local situ-
ation. A generalized type then offers individuals a basis for comparing
182 O. Dreier
commonalities and differences between their scopes, but not their concrete compo-
sition and dynamics.
After 1983, Holzkamp elaborates his notion of generalization in two respects
which expand his view on individual subjectivity while maintaining that individual
lives primarily are mediated by the overall social structure. In the first elaboration,
he argues that we must define the pattern of individual subjects’ reasons for action
in relation to their scope of possibilities in a particular position/situation (e.g., 1986;
see also Markard 2010). Subjects hold patterns of reasons because they relate to
their complexly structured scope of possibilities as well as to their complex set of
needs and interests, abilities, and cognitive and emotional processes in rela-
tion hereto.
A typified general pattern of reasons in relation to a general scope of possibilities
for subjects in a similar position/situation offers individual subjects a richer, more
valuable knowledge. But establishing such a type is more complex because we must
capture and match the complex structure of meaningful societal scopes of possibili-
ties with the complex pattern of subjective reasons. It becomes less likely that we
can define a generalized type of scopes/reasons precisely and with a close fit
between individual members. While subjects already relate to their scopes of pos-
sibilities in varied ways, adding their patterns of reasons increases the variability
and complexity. A subject’s pattern of reasons may not even be so stable, unvarying,
and general.
Holzkamp’s last elaboration and revision of his conception (2013b) is triggered
by the insufficiency of anchoring subjects in an immediate situation within a social
structure. Subjects are involved in conducting their everyday life and phenomena
and problems must be studied as they appear in particular scenes of their conduct of
everyday life. Scenes are, so to speak, situations anchored in subjects’ concrete
conduct of their everyday lives. Subjects’ localities and activities then come more to
the fore. Studying common problems in particular scenes may establish links to
other subjects through typification. Holzkamp views scenes and the conduct of
everyday life as affected by the mediated influence of the social structure therein.
He also suggests studying how a problem—say, about learning in school—is
affected by a subject’s conduct of everyday life in other social contexts. But he did
not manage to complete his work on the conduct of everyday life. Thus, he did not
go much into a subject’s conduct of everyday life as a complex whole or into how
the composition, dynamics, and issues of the conduct of everyday life are embedded
in the social structure of everyday life.
Picking up the argument where Holzkamp’s work ended, concrete situations and
scenes are part of a social practice in a local social context and affected by it. They
must be grasped accordingly. And these social practices in social contexts are part
of the overall social practice of a society through which this society and the life of
its members are re-produced and changed. Indeed, the complex practice of a society
is divided into many social practices in different social contexts which hang together
in that way. This hanging-togetherness constitutes the structure of practice of a soci-
ety. How they hang together, rests on the socio-material arrangement of the struc-
ture of practice of a society which also involves arrangements of pathways and links
and access or exclusion between contextual social practices as well as arrangements
of the practices in these contexts. We can, hence, not comprehend an aspect of a
societal practice, context, scene, and situation as an isolated element or stimulus.
Instead, we must grasp how it is involved in a particular social practice that hangs
together in a particular way. Its qualities and meaning do not adhere to it as an iso-
lated element but are affected by the composition of the social practice it is involved
in and its particular status in it. Likewise, aspects of the overall social structure gain
a particular meaning for participants in the practice of a local social context depend-
ing on how these aspects are involved in its arrangements and composition. To assist
us analytically, we, therefore, need a concept about such hanging-togetherness. I
call it the nexus of a society, a social practice, a social context, etc. Other related
concepts are insufficient because it is too ambiguous whether they merely stipulate
that certain aspects are linked, connected, related, or that they also hang together, in
the sense that they always are aspects of a nexus of social practice and cannot exist
and go on outside any nexus. Moreover, nexuses of social practice are dynamic
because they are re-produced and changed in practice and because they hold inter-
nal tensions and contradictions. Their composition and the status and power of par-
ticular aspects then fluctuate, vary, and change and some aspects cease to matter
while others emerge.
As embodied beings, individual subjects always are situated in the nexus of a
local social context (cf. Valsiner 2015: 235) and live by taking part in re-producing
and changing social practices. A person’s life and psychological functioning then
always hangs together with the world and in the world with its arrangements of
social practice. Persons survive and develop by hanging together with the world in
contextual social practices. They must, therefore, be theorized as participants in
social practices. A basic approach to persons cannot focus only on persons and situ-
ations as usually seen in psychology. Their activity as ongoing participation in the
social practice of a local social context must be added as a third dimension.
Moreover, their psychological processes are not linked with an isolated stimulus but
directed at their ongoing participation in the nexus of social practice of this context.
And their psychological processes do not function as mutually separate elements
but are combined and configured as aspects of their participation in the situated
nexus of this ongoing social practice. The anti-elementarist and anti-essentialist cri-
tique of the methodology of mainstream psychology is, thus, founded in a matching
view on individual psychological functioning. Furthermore, as a participant, what a
person can do and does is rarely only up to, or only matters to, him- or herself but
184 O. Dreier
also, though not in the same way, to the other involved participants. Participants’
possibilities, and the cooperation and conflicts between them, thus depend on each
other and hang together with the contextual arrangements and structures
(Højholt 2016).
When we study persons in a local social context—and in its situations and
scenes—we must, hence, consider the purposes and socio-material arrangements of
the social practice of this context with the distribution of positions, responsibilities,
and tasks between the participants. In doing so, we take the nexus of this contextual
social practice as our starting point and important source of knowing the participat-
ing subjects and we contextualize their different powers and scopes of
possibilities.
On this background, we can study subjects’ experiences, states of mind, con-
cerns, stakes, understandings, and stances in relation to a situation/scene in the
social practice of this context. We can analyze how subjects configure their experi-
ences and participation and what their concerns and stakes, understandings and
stances hang together with in the social practice of this context. We can also inves-
tigate how the nexus of practice in this context affects the meaning of a particular
phenomenon or problem for a subject, how he or she experiences it as well as his or
her possibilities in relation to it. In doing so, we grasp subjects in the dynamic nexus
of a local, contextual practice.
By taking the typical arrangement of certain contextual, social practices—e.g.,
therapy sessions, classrooms, work places, families—as our starting point, we can
identify similarities and differences between the concrete practices we study, estab-
lish typified generalizations of the subjective phenomena and problems therein and
analyze how and why they differ in certain respects. We can also grasp whether and
how subjects are aware of and relate to the general aspects of the typical arrangements.
But subjects do not live by all conditions around them. They pick out and realize
some possibilities—not all and not the same. Individual life is a selective affair.
Social practice is so rich and complex that individual subjects must respond and live
in selective ways. Because their conditions hang together, they must pick up other
possibilities later. Individual knowledge is also selective. It highlights, extracts and
configures some aspects while setting aside others—even when subjects seek to
grasp the connections between partial knowledges in a more comprehensive grasp
of the nexus of historical practice (Holzkamp 1973: 373). In fact, knowledge is not
a part–whole relationship because knowing everything is a contradiction in terms.
We can always ask what is not attended to, set aside, or ignored. Some of these
aspects may be picked up later and this may lead to reconsiderations and changes in
a person’s knowledge and participation. But individual knowledge is marked by
degrees of uncertainty, obscurity, by not quite understanding and being aware of
understanding only to some degree and in some respects. Critical questions must,
therefore, be asked about what is not attended to and ignored.
Moreover, in complex social structures of practice, subjects live by taking part in
more than one social practice and context. In the course of their activities, they
move into other contexts to take part in other practices. What was said above about
their participation in the social practice of a context must then be considered again.
10 Generalizations in Situated Practices 185
But taking part in other social practices/contexts has other meanings and involves
other possibilities for subjects. They do so for other reasons and it involves other
problems. If a common problem is involved, it is a similar problem and not an iden-
tical one. It is affected by being part of another nexus so that it emerges and passes
in other ways with other possibilities and stakes of dealing with it and another
meaning to the subject. Problems are part of different nexuses in diverse contexts.
Furthermore, in other social practices/contexts, persons often take part with other
co-participants.
Subjects’ participations in different social practices/contexts affect their general-
izations. They get to know other things and other aspects of a phenomenon/problem
in other practices/contexts, including what it hangs together with in these other
practices/contexts which creates other possibilities for dealing with it. They may
learn why a problem is similar or different in other nexuses and which aspects of
these nexuses are particularly important in this respect. They are, in short, afforded
a more differentiated and diverse basis for generalizing about it.
When different social practices/contexts afford diverse sources of knowing, per-
sons must find out which sources they trust, appropriate, and use to reconsider their
understandings or let pass them by and disregard. They may also seek to grasp the
connections between various partial knowledges in a more encompassing compre-
hension. The more comprehensive and differentiated basis of knowing and general-
izing confirms, revises, and expands their knowledge from former contexts and their
understanding of what is common/general. This view on developing a more sub-
stantial knowledge contrasts with the notion that we must gain distance from imme-
diate situations to rise above the superficial appearances of what is taken for granted
and acquire deep knowledge. Rather than simply being at a distance, subjects are
somewhere else with other arrangements and sources of knowing which matter pre-
cisely because they offer other possibilities of knowing. These other sources must
then be compared, confronted, and combined into a revised, more comprehensive
understanding.
Finally, subjects may try to find out how a certain phenomenon or problem
unfolds and is dealt with in other similar social practices, say, in other families than
their own. How and why does it unfold, and is dealt with, differently in similar
practices? What can a participant in such a local practice learn from other similar
practices? Is a way of dealing with a phenomenon or problem typical of a certain
social practice? What do the various instances then have in common? And how do
these commonalities hang together with other aspects of the nexuses of this typical
social practice?
Because persons live by taking part in several social practices/contexts, it is
insufficient to consider how their experiences, concerns, reasons, etc. in the social
practice of their present context are mediated by the overall social structure. Their
experiences, concerns, reasons, and participation here are also mediated by their
experiences, concerns, reasons, and participation in other contexts. In fact, persons
living by taking part in several social contexts/practices must pursue many concerns
in their personal trajectories of participation across several social contexts/practices.
These pursuits depend on the structural arrangement of access or exclusion, available
186 O. Dreier
positions as well as the places and time intervals of social practices are part of the
structural arrangements of social practices. Persons also take advantage of relevant
differences between the purposes and scopes of those practices for their pursuit of a
certain concern. Such pursuits in trajectories of participation offer important oppor-
tunities for learning and generalizing.
But their pursuits in trajectories are involved in a more general personal effort.
Living in a complex structure of social practice, subjects must seek to conduct their
everyday life in order to get done what they must do and what matters most to them,
take care that their life does not fall apart in the complexities and contradictions of
social practices, and establish an everyday life with the qualities which suit them
best and which they treasure most (Dreier 2008, 2016; Holzkamp 2013b). They
must also arrange their conduct of life in relation to the socio-structural arrange-
ments for how everyday lives may be lived across times and places. Individual sub-
jects’ participations in various contexts are, thus, involved in their conduct of
everyday life across them and so are the various situations and scenes. Subjects’
participations in various contexts, scenes, and situations, hence, gain a particular
status and meaning for them. Their concerns, stakes, reasons, and problems in rela-
tion to various contexts hang together in their conduct of everyday life and must be
grasped on the background of their status in its dynamic and contradictory nexus.
How they deal with them in particular social contexts is, thus, mediated by their
conduct of everyday life and its pursuits across contexts. In short, the way individ-
ual subjects conduct their everyday life frames how they address possibilities and
problems, learn and generalize.
When social practices change, subjects encounter these changes in their every-
day life and may be challenged to maintain their present conduct of everyday life or
change it in some respects. In changes of social practice, some aspects lose, increase,
or change their significance while others arise or replace them and their composi-
tion changes (cf. Juul Jensen 2013: 188). They then hang together in other ways
with a changing dynamic of re-production and further changes. In the process, par-
ticipants’ possibilities change and so do their understandings of these practices and
of themselves, their problems, concerns, and reasons in them. Changes of social
practice may be brought about by mediated influences from elsewhere, by events
impinging on this practice, by the accumulated effects of many minor alterations, by
participants’ pursuits or by a mixture or sequence thereof. It, therefore, varies to
what degree participants see these changes as outcomes of their purposeful efforts
or as occurring without their doing so that they are exposed to them and must
accommodate their participation. Like the dynamics of re-production of social prac-
tices, their dynamics of change is characterized by tensions, ruptures, and contradic-
tions and by ensuing conflicts between the participants. This affects participants’
understandings, concerns, and pursuits so that the course of changes may become
more erratic. Issues of change may become objects of struggle between participants,
including struggles to find each other again in more concerted pursuits and under-
standings. Furthermore, changes in social practices and in participants’ lives therein
are open-ended. Their processes, phenomena, and problems reach no finite end-
point and complete definition and participants’ understandings and knowledge
10 Generalizations in Situated Practices 187
at stake for her in dealing with being terrified and seeking to overcome the attacks.
In school, she is, for instance, terrified of being harassed by the other children if
they find out that she suffers from anxieties. So, she seeks to avoid attacks by not
going to the toilet because she cannot stay behind its closed door, by withdrawing
socially to avoid other children witnessing her attacks, etc. This conflicts with the
increasing importance to her, and to her developing conduct of everyday life, of
having friends and being part of communities of children and this conflict affects
her self-understanding and how she sees herself able to deal with her anxieties. As
a consequence, she increasingly withdraws and spends her time after school at
home. Her parents find it difficult to practice indirect care for her and her anxieties
when she is in other places without them. They then concentrate on their direct care
for her and her anxieties at home. Here they do what they can for her to avoid
attacks, for instance, by accompanying her to the toilet, to the basement and in the
lift and by bringing and fetching her when she is going places. But none of this
helps her overcome her anxiety attacks. She, rather, becomes more dependent of her
parents and hangs around more at home in a docile, self-depreciating, and dissatis-
fied manner.
How do the girl’s experiences and understandings of her anxieties and the ways
in which she tries to overcome having attacks change in her participation in and
across her situated nexuses of practice? At the beginning of therapy, she experiences
her anxiety attacks as gushing forth in her unpredictably and uncontrollably due to
an incomprehensible personal weakness so that she finds it difficult to do anything
other than to try to forestall and avoid them. She gradually realizes that her anxiety
attacks hang together with what she may run into, how she can handle and get out
of difficulties, and how others may help her or make them worse in the nexuses of
her social practices. She also pays more attention to how her attacks limit important
possibilities and pursuits for her and considers what it may take to re-open them.
Her understanding of her anxiety attacks, thus, changes from a personalized notion
of an internal characteristic, operating as an uncontrollable cause of her behavior, to
realizing that her anxiety points beyond herself into her participation in various
nexuses and arises for more or less understandable reasons therein. This under-
standing is consolidated by her attempts to do something about her anxiety attacks
by finding out what they hang together with, finding other ways of addressing these
problematic nexuses and finding and becoming able to seize suitable opportunities
and events for overcoming having attacks. This gradually evolves into becoming
able to make situated analyses of her anxiety attacks, their varying nexuses, and
what it may take to avert and overcome them. These situated analyses are guided by
her understanding of what her various anxiety attacks have in common.
This change process is promoted by what the girl learns about her anxiety prob-
lem by comparing its situated occurrences and qualities so that their commonalities
as well as why they differ in different nexuses stand out more clearly. That leads to
a richer and more coherent understanding of her anxiety which is more explicit
about what she must consider and take advantage of in dealing with it and overcom-
ing it in various nexuses. So, her understanding of her problem changes as she
changes her awareness of how and where she may change it and reappreciates and
10 Generalizations in Situated Practices 189
some cases, or replaced by others, and “attributes” really are aspects of nexuses in
contexts of practice where they are affected by being linked in varying and changing
ways. That is why we must study concrete nexuses and how aspects thereof hang
together in varying and changing ways. Because mainstream generalizations are not
conceived in this way, we face difficult reconsiderations of whether a particular
generalization can be upheld or how it must be modified to hold as a common aspect
of concrete nexuses.
Wittgenstein even warns against putting all stakes on strict generalizations
because clearly delimited generalizations are thin or not always evident. In our lan-
guage, he argues, concepts represent co-existing similarities and differences of het-
erogeneous elements displaying family resemblances (1953: § 66 and 67). Common
aspects are then not identical but similar and co-exist with differences so that con-
cepts refer to non-identical cases of resemblances in “a complicated network of
overlapping and criss-crossing similarities” and differences (ibid.: § 66). No fixed
set of necessary and sufficient conditions then determines membership of a concept.
Rather, as Medina (2003: 660) puts it, “we treat all kinds of different things as the
same although they are not strictly identical in any respect; that is, in our categoriza-
tions different things are treated as instances of the same category even though there
is no aspect (or set of aspects) that they all have in common: many different kinds
of activities are called games and many different kinds of artifacts are called chairs;
and we can always add new items to the list of things that fall under these concepts
(we can always invent new kinds of game and produce new kinds of chairs).”
The abstract variable-based knowledge affords a thin grasp of concrete phenom-
ena because it discards particulars, concrete nexuses, and what matters therein for
the allegedly general aspect. As a result, we find a loss of worldliness in psychology
because it does not conceive phenomena through their links with the historical
structures of the world with their structures of meaning and possibilities
(Holzkamp 2013a).
The state, institutions, and companies delimit what they hold themselves account-
able for, and responsible for in relation to the population, by referring to knowledge
about abstract means in a normal distribution of general variables. Research-based
expert practices also rely on such knowledge to legitimize their expertise and its
conduct in practice. The abstract knowledge then delimits what experts focus on and
are held accountable for in the expert systems. It particularizes their notion of prob-
lems and their responsibilities to particular, abstract general issues as opposed to
concrete problems in nexuses of everyday life. The new public management sys-
tems accentuate this by delimiting the accountability of particular service units and
dividing accountabilities between units more strictly and, thus, leaving more to
people themselves. Furthermore, this form of knowledge and expertise does not
include what produces variety and singularity in the problems which subjects pres-
ent. How subjects conduct their everyday lives with others in their nexuses of social
practice and how their problem is involved therein and affected thereby also fall
outside this form of knowledge as do the ambiguities of everyday living.
Consequently, experts must apply pieces of abstract, variable-based knowledge on
subjects’ complex problems in the nexuses of their lives—or subjects must
10 Generalizations in Situated Practices 191
References
Dreier, O. (2007). The generality and particularity of knowledge. In V. van Deventer, M. Terre
Blanche, E. Fourier, & P. Segalo (Eds.), Citizen city: Between constructed agent and con-
structed agency (pp. 188–196). Concord: Captus Press.
Dreier, O. (2008). Psychotherapy in everyday life. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Dreier, O. (2011). Intervention, evidence-based research and everyday life. In P. Stenner, J. Cromby,
J. Motzkau, J. Yen, & Y. Haosheng (Eds.), Theoretical psychology: Global transformations and
challenges (pp. 260–269). Concord: Captus Press.
Dreier, O. (2015). Interventions in everyday lives: How clients use psychotherapy outside their
sessions. European Journal of Psychotherapy and Counselling, 17(2), 114–128. https://doi.org
/10.1080/13642537.2015.1027781.
Dreier, O. (2016). Conduct of everyday life: Implications for critical psychology. In E. Schraube &
C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 15–33). London: Routledge.
Dreier, O. (in press). Critical psychology—Subjects in situated social practices. In M. Fleer,
F. González Rey, & P. Jones (Eds.), Cultural-historical and critical psychology: Common
ground, divergences and future pathways (pp. xx–xx). New York: Springer.
González Rey, F., Mitjáns Martínez, A., & Goulart, D. M. (Eds.). (2018). Subjectivity within
cultural-historical approach: Theory, methodology and research. New York: Springer.
Haug, F. (1981). Dialektisk teori og empirisk metodik. Udkast, 9, 8–26.
Højholt, C. (2016). Situated inequality and the conflictuality of children’s conduct of life. In
E. Schraube & C. Højholt (Eds.), Psychology and the conduct of everyday life (pp. 145–163).
London: Routledge.
Holzkamp, K. (1973). Sinnliche Erkenntnis. Historischer Ursprung und gesellschaftliche Funktion
der Wahrnehmung. Frankfurt/M: Fischer Athenäum.
Holzkamp, K. (1981/1964). Theorie und Experiment in der Psychologie. Eine grundlagenkritische
Untersuchung. Berlin: de Gruyter.
Holzkamp, K. (1983). Grundlegung der Psychologie. Frankfurt/M: Campus Verlag.
Holzkamp, K. (1986). Die Verkennung von Handlungsbegründungen als empirische
Zusammenhangsannahmen in sozialpsychologischen Theorien. Methodologische
Fehlorientierung infolge von Begriffsverwirrung. Zeitschrift für Sozialpsychologie, 17,
216–238.
Holzkamp, K. (2013a/1994). Missing the point: Variable psychology’s blindness to the problem’s
inherent coherences. In E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint
of the subject: Writings of Klaus Holzkamp (pp. 60–74). Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Holzkamp, K. (2013b/1995). Psychology: Social self-understanding on the reasons for action in
the conduct of everyday life. In E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the
standpoint of the subject: Writings of Klaus Holzkamp (pp. 233–341). Basingstoke: Palgrave
Macmillan.
Jensen, U. J. (2013). Resistance against experiments: Positioning and rationality in medicine. In
M. W. Bauer, R. Harré, & C. Jensen (Eds.), Resistance and practice of rationality (pp. 182–
205). Newcastle upon Tyne: Cambridge Scholars Press.
Lewin, K. (1981). Wissenschaftstheorie 1. Kurt-Lewin-Werkausgabe. Band. 1. Bern: Hans Huber.
Markard, M. (2010). Einführung in die kritische Psychologie. Hamburg: Argument.
Medina, J. (2003). Identity trouble: Disidentification and the problem of difference. Philosophy &
Social Criticism, 29, 657–682.
Ruben, P. (1978). Wissenschaft als allgemeine Arbeit. In P. Ruben (Ed.), Dialektik und Arbeit der
Philosophie (pp. 9–51). Köln: Pahl Rugenstein.
Smith, D. S. (1990). The conceptual practices of power: A feminist sociology of knowledge.
Toronto: University of Toronto Press.
Tateo, L. (2015). The nature of generalization in psychology. In G. Marsico, R. A. Ruggeri, &
S. Salvatore (Eds.), Reflexivity and psychology (pp. 45–64). Charlotte: Information Age
Publication.
10 Generalizations in Situated Practices 193
Valsiner, J. (2015). Generalization is possible only from a single case (and from a single instance):
The value of a personal diary. In B. Wagoner, N. Chaudhary, & P. Hviid (Eds.), Integrating
experience: Body and mind moving between contexts (pp. 233–243). Charlotte: Information
Age Publication.
Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations (3rd ed.). New York: Macmillan.
Chapter 11
Situated Generalization with Prototypes
in Dialogical Teaching
Morten Nissen and Line Lerche Mørck
Introduction
This chapter theorizes situated generalization through discussing the practical case
of a PhD course we held in 2017 called “The Psycho-Politics of Self-Exposure.”
The course is seen as performing generalizations, and our rendering of it is itself an
attempt to generalize, that is, to model it as prototypical of dialogical teaching.
We are among the many researchers who try to integrate research and teaching.
The ideal goes back to Plato and to various degrees, all university administrations
pay lipservice to it. Often it is simply the demand that the most recent textbooks are
used in teaching, and the experience that researchers learn, in a vague sense, from
engaging with students. More ambitious versions, however, point to possibilities for
teaching to be (seen as) part of the broad range of practices that perform research,
especially when research is about education, or more widely, human development
(e.g., Davies and Gannon 2006; Haug 2003; Liberali 2009). Our aim is to continue
this more challenging route. We explore concrete processes of production and gen-
eralization of scientific knowledge across contexts of research, teaching, and other
practices, which are partly overlapping, and partly engaged in exchange. In these,
participants from multiple positions adopt standards and standpoints derived from
and referring to multiple practices and are invited “to speak, to think, to matter, to
care”—as one participant put it, quoting another—in ways that allow for generali-
ties to emerge, which are at once findings and lessons learned.
This text models the PhD course as prototypical, that is, represents it and sug-
gests it as relevant for a (thus) generalized kind of practice called “dialogical
teaching.” The construction of a prototype (as situated generalization) is a process
with different (nonlinear) steps or actions. Among these are comparing and relating.
p resentations at the course, as well as provided “data” to this text by writing the
“Letters to Us” which became the final teaching-learning-research activity of our
course?3
There is no end to such questions—we mention just a few of them to illustrate
the point that, with this text, we are at once performing and modelling the self-
representation that our course was about and which we wish to highlight here as an
aspect of generalization.
Prototypes
3
We decided that all participants write a text to “us” all in which he/she reflected on his/her experi-
ence and what he/she took from it. This idea was derived from narrative counselling and taught us
by Mille Keis.
198 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
Lave’s use of this term echoes not only Stuart Hall’s but also Ilyenkov’s reconstruc-
tion of Marx’ dialectics (Ilyenkov, 1977, 1982), which has been widely taken up in
the socio-cultural-historical tradition.5 Abstractions are not endpoints but tools,
Similarly “political” reading of the Vygotskian legacy can be found in Stetsenko (2017).
4
Thus not only by Holzkamp, but, notably and most famously, in Dawydow (1973).
5
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 199
whose utility and implications are realized as, rising to the concrete, they provide
possibilities of thinking and doing that had not been immediately reflected in the
“sensuously concrete” everyday experience. Through this process, concepts medi-
ate and reconfigure experience into the “thought concrete” (Gedankenkonkretum),
which Lave—again building on Hall’s reading of the Marxian tradition (through
Althusser)—calls a “practice problematic.” Exploring a practice problematic is
reconstructing theory by rising to the concrete to understand contradictions and
conflicts in practices undergoing or calling for change—a change that is radical
enough for theory to be relevant. This is one way to read the epistemological con-
cept of “revolutionary practice” in Marx’ Feuerbach Theses (2018):
III. The materialist doctrine concerning the changing of circumstances and upbringing for-
gets that circumstances are changed by men and that it is essential to educate the educator
himself. This doctrine must, therefore, divide society into two parts, one of which is supe-
rior to society. The coincidence of the changing of circumstances and of human activity or
self-changing can be conceived and rationally understood only as revolutionary practice.
We quote Marx’ Feuerbach Theses because it is probably the most important single
text in philosophies of practice. Written at the watershed that asserted dialectics as
a reflection on practice, its few pages contain important resources for anyone who
wishes to educate educators and reflect on self-change. But of course we should not
restrict ourselves to the Marxian legacy. Among the many issues that have been
taken up in what is sometimes dubbed “post-Marxism” are two which have informed
our ways of thinking about generalization. Both issues are also present, if not always
prominent, in the development of GSCP and social practice theory.
The first issue is with the singularity of practices and their agent-subjects, the “I”s
and the “We”s. Our way of working with situated generalization involves many dif-
ferent people, participating from different positions, and contributing to, applying
and recontextualizing prototypes in and across very different research projects and
interdisciplinary research practices, which, in turn, seek relevance in different prac-
tices that are not designated as “research,” and even beyond any preexisting prac-
tice. This implies an onto-epistemology of practice, which not only suggests an
(ever contested) notion of a universal practice, or “praxis” in the terminology of
Bernstein (1971), but also a plurality of “practices” that can and should be distin-
guished both as kinds (i.e., as enacting different standards) and as singulars, situ-
ated in time and space, performed by (thus recognized) singular collectives. In this
article, dialogical teaching is conceptualized as a kind of practice, articulating
standards of democratic dialogue, thinking, listening and care, situated and per-
formed in a singular collective, our PhD course.
In each practice, praxis forms a crucial ethical horizon: the overall process in
which we humans reproduce and develop our conditions and the forms of our lives
and activities. This horizon is important here, not only as the ethical yardstick of
200 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
generalization (which is itself continuously developed and contested, not least when
singular practices and collectives are struggling for recognition), but also as the
“universal labor” (allgemeine Arbeit) which, since Marx (1999—revising Hegel’s
concept of “spirit”), has been a way to determine what research is about. Research
is itself a kind of practice, and, just as with other kinds of practice, our ethical and
theoretical goal here is to think about the relations between the particular kind of
practice, i.e., the particular standards, and the overall praxis, which is not just an
abstract category (not just “practice”), but itself a living process. This part of our
argument remains within a Hegelian articulation of the Marxist tradition.
But the opposite movement, that of designating, delimiting, and recognizing sin-
gular practices, as performed by singular collectives, requires a more thoroughgo-
ing development of Marx’ social theory. Singular collectives were never theorized
properly in the Marxist classics, keen as they were to overcome Hegel’s “statism.”
Right from the beginning, Marxism struggled with the often disastrous implications
of how singular collectives (such as states, parties, or families) were constituted,
including, not least, those constituted by Marxists. Only very gradually, a strand of
theory emerged that would suggest concepts to grasp such processes of constitution,
mostly by going back to Hegel’s concept of recognition, and using it to rethink
“ideology.”6 In research, this implies that (a) “rising to the concrete” is not only the
meeting of “theory” with (revolutionary) “practice,” but also the collaboration or
“joint venture” of one (more or less institutionalized but) singular practice (one of
research) with another (one of, e.g., teaching or social work); this “joint venture” is
then itself a singular, dialogical, or hybrid practice that takes up standards (general-
izations) as “references” and transforms them by so doing; and (b) individual and
collective agent-subjects are engaged in struggles for recognition through which
they are constituted as self-reflecting subjects, mediated by the standards or gener-
alities that are referenced and transformed in these “ideological” processes to which
research contributes.
The second issue concerns how to think of texts and other artifacts as mediators and
co-constructors of knowledge. It is the “new materialism” and “actor-network”
approaches in science studies that have generally explored the implications of tech-
nologies as not simply means to the ends given by human agents, but as carrying
material constraints and as co-configuring ends. Although this materialism was
6
For example, Žižek (2004), Balibar (2016), and Højrup (2003). In GSCP, the problem was
addressed to some extent in Dreier’s work on local action contexts (Dreier 2008), and the works of
Wolf Haug and colleagues on ideology (Haug 1979).
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 201
already implied in Hegel’s “cunning of reason” and Marx’ dialectics of the forces
and relations of production, the Modernism inherent to Marxism often occluded the
most radical implications, especially when these apply to social science itself. These
were not least pertinent to the understanding of text. Reflecting text as a technology
implies a historically situated conception of meaning as continuously reconstructed
with signs or signifying artifacts. This means taking seriously the genealogies of
discourse, and it means working on texts in an affirmative or immanent critique that
deconstructs them and rearticulates their contradictory tendencies as relevant to
contemporary problematics. It also means widening the field of “discourse” to all
those model artifacts that embody meaning. This includes of course those that are
specialized as signs and thus require but also potentially transform conventions, the
“tertiary artifacts” in Wartofsky’s term (1979), such as text or money. But it also
includes the more general interchange of enactment and display in performance, as
this evolves into and mediates through the processes of subjectification and objecti-
fication that characterize human practices. These aspects of texts (and other inscrip-
tion devices or technologies) are often ignored in the traditional methodologies that
standardize (even qualitative) research; but they become relevant the moment we
endeavor to develop our research through dialogue or “joint ventures” with other
practices. Dialogue calls forth the intertextuality of our texts with a multitude of
other texts written in other genres, as well as with other media of modelling, e.g.,
aesthetic or performative, etc.7
The “industrial” concept of prototype points our attention to how a thing may be
produced as a model for practices of production and practices of use, working in
conjunction with historically emerging infrastructures of blueprints, texts, etc. At
the stage of “prototype,” it is not yet “black-boxed” and separated from the histori-
cal situation of its emergence. It is singular; yet it visibly carries the contested hope
for a wider relevance in a world to come. The singular model artifact suggests a
standard, a generality that is specific, yet ethically deserves a place in the world, in
praxis. At the same time, it thereby mediates and shapes the precarious recognition
of the individuals and collectives who produce it and use it.
Thus, the concept of prototype points to generality as the standards of situated
singular practices and collectives, objectified and recognized with model artifacts
that suggest a wider relevance for other practices and collectives—and on the hori-
zon of praxis. And it points to how such prototypes, mediated by such models, are
taken up as references in other situated singular practices, and reflected and trans-
formed in the process (rather than taken as rules and regulations for reproducing the
practices as putatively identical, as in standardization; cf. Nissen 2016).
7
Cf. e.g., Bakhtin (1988), Martin (2007), Rancière (2013), Smith (2005), Stiegler (2013). In GSCP,
this is first of all taken up in the “memory work” of Frigga Haug and her colleagues (Haug 1999,
2012)—as we shall see.
202 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
By contrast,
This course has given me the opportunity to speak and to think. Because, it matters what do
I have to say, and it matters what everybody says. It matters to “us,” it matters to our
research, to people we are doing research for and for the practice we want to improve or
develop. It is astonishingly liberating to speak and to listen without being evaluated for
what you said or how you understood something. Everything matters.
Ana’s praise is of course welcome, but our reason for quoting it here is that the
rupture she identifies articulates the hope that defines our dialogical teaching experi-
ment as prototypical: that it matters what everybody says, teachers make note of
students’ utterances, and this is related to identifying the community of teachers and
students as one of “research.” In particular, this “astonishing liberation,” this recog-
nition, is connected with no longer asking for instructions, and no longer “being
evaluated.”
Now, this emancipation could be identified as simply “non-scholastic,” as the
emancipation that comes from simply rejecting teaching. In our theoretical tradi-
tions, we have famous examples that many readers take to confirm such a complete
anti- or non-teaching as ideal. Holzkamp used the Pink Floyd song-title “We don’t
need no education” for a provocative critique of the idea of “teaching for peace”
(Holzkamp 1983b); Lave’s “situated learning” ignores teaching almost completely
as relevant to understanding learning; Rancière’s “Ignorant Schoolmaster” (1991);
and Freire’s “Pedagogy of the Oppressed” (1996) seem to reject any preexisting
knowledge to be transmitted. Doing away with teaching could then be either thought
as a general utopia (as in Christie 1971), or—more cynically—it could be viewed as
the elitist, scholarly but non-scholastic practices that, for a tiny minority (e.g., at
PhD courses: “master classes”), may become accessible after decades at school.
But that is not how we suggest to see it—and it would not be a very deep or pro-
ductive way to read those theories. Rather, what we propose is a rearticulation and
a reconfiguration of teaching as a version of “the education of educators.” More
precisely, inspired by these references and others we can articulate dialogical teach-
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 203
view format for teacher presentations, too. But the students who present their
research all do it in the format of an interview. More specifically: one teacher has
communicated in advance with the student about her project and possible ways of
presenting it. They decide together roughly which issues will be discussed, and
which materials may be relevant for participants to study in preparation for the ses-
sion, some of which may be useful to present live at the session (e.g., video mate-
rial). At the session, the teacher interviews the student. At certain points, the
interview is interrupted as we shift to the reflecting team, which is the rest of the
participants (students, teachers, and co-researchers). These then discuss the inter-
view among each other, while interviewee and interviewer listen silently. When the
interview is then resumed, it may reflect on issues raised by the reflecting team, but
not address the team directly. No questions and answers!
In our experience, it takes some insistent moderation to discipline this unconven-
tional format. But the interview has the advantages that: (a) the student does not
build up so much anxiety about presenting; (b) the interviewer can modify the pre-
sentation to be more accessible (as representative of the audience), and (c) the ques-
tions represent and perform the theoretical approach as well as its relevance to lived
researcher experience. Further, the point of orchestrating the session on two sepa-
rate discussions (interview and reflecting team) is to highlight reflection and to
avoid the attack-defense sequence of the traditional Q&A.
In the first instance, the process of reference transformation can be said to be clearly
represented. The interview format de-textualizes, resituates, and collectivizes pre-
sentations, that is, it highlights the ways in which the interviewee’s utterances are
continuously reflected as relevant, or in need of clarification, explanation, etc., and
it also performs and demonstrates their double contextualization in the experience,
activities, and projects of both interlocutors. The reflecting team stages and high-
lights the distance of speaking from listening: listeners’ reflections are emphasized
as such and contextualized: it becomes acceptable—in fact, it is encouraged—to
“witness” the interview through one’s own interests.8 Thereby, conversely, the inter-
view is externalized and “exotisized” (e.g., “is that how what I said was heard!”).
This redistribution of responsibilities for what is said and heard works—especially
when it stands out as an unusual conversation format—as a collectivization of
accountability. This, in turn, allows for the collective work of reference transforma-
tion to appear and to be prioritized, the co-construction of models and the various
ways in which it transforms statements taken from the experience in one practice or
from certain texts.
Mille B. Keis, another PhD student participant, explains in her “Letter to Us”:
One of the things I particularly enjoyed about the course was the “hacking” of the usual
project presentation format with inspiration from the reflecting team, and it made a differ-
ence to me in several ways in relation to presenting my project. (…) In preparing my pre-
sentation and the accompanying paper, I felt more able to experiment with the format and
purpose. Instead of (the more usual way of) having to present an argument, which would
then be “tested” and discussed, the purpose of this paper felt different. I wanted this particu-
lar paper to provide a starting point for joint conversations, to be an invitation to collabora-
tive thinking instead of a performance of the strength of my approach and argument, and
this shift in purpose created a different kind of space for the exploration of my own ques-
tions, interest and concerns.
Of course, we are not suggesting that simply applying the “reflecting team” as stan-
dard method constitutes a wonderfully democratic revolution of teaching. What we
are doing here is rearticulating the reflective team method as a collective process of
sharing authority, of creating dialogical spaces to listen, to speak, and to think with
each other (as opposed to thinking against each other). Our claim is that such dia-
logical spaces can produce feelings of mattering, of collective care, precisely by
highlighting how the learning of each person unfolds as contributions to a collective
practice of research; in other words, by facilitating a reflective witnessing and co-
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 207
9
German term for the movement of “dealing with the past,” which grew and became significant
from the 1980s and on.
208 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
for this meeting.10 It was something between me and my group, something I could not
explain, that goes beyond empathy with the victims. I felt guilt. The insight hit me hard,
when I realized that belonging to a group of Serbs was deeply embedded in my identity, so
deeply that I felt collective guilt for the crimes that were committed by criminals, but in the
name of Serbia, my homeland.
e=lnms&tbm=isch&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjW3ui9xLXTAhXGnBoKHbeMATgQ_AUIBigB&bi
w=1600&bih=721#tbm=isch&q=Ron+Haviv+Bosnia.
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 209
glimpses. It may well have been useful to pursue this more than we did. But, in any
case, from the beginning, the widening of relevance which resulted from engaging
with Ana’s project as something more than a case of application of the course syl-
labus, also revealed the limitations of that syllabus. The question was not so much
whether Ana was able to use our texts for her case, but rather, whether and how our
texts could contribute to Ana’s project. This meant that they were inserted into a
landscape of other relevant texts.
Of course, the syllabus was the sanctioned set of textual artifacts carrying and
signifying the knowledge that institutionally defined our course. We teachers were
accountable as custodians of that knowledge, overseers of the correct reading of the
syllabus. It might then seem a reasonable expectation that our “teaching” should
inform students how we intended to sanction their reading as correct.
By contrast, the reflecting team stages conversations in which the interlocutors
are all positioned at a distance to syllabus and other texts. What participants say may
refer to texts (among other artifacts, experiences, etc.), but the interview and the
reflections situate those texts as references deployed when relevant; and referencing
does not assume an identity but designate tools and objects for a collective under-
standing in which we are equally participants.
The widening of relevance, however, does not mean that texts are endlessly mal-
leable to diverse purposes. Far from it, when we refer to “deconstruction”—sug-
gesting a continuity of (this version of) dialectics with Derrida’s approach to
theory11—we assert the (at least potential) relevance of theoretical work.
11
Derrida’s objections to dialectics were primarily to its institutionalized form and the sanctifica-
tion of certain teleologies it seemed to him to imply. Cf. Jameson (2009). Incidentally, Haug
(1999) also referred to deconstruction, albeit without explicitly mentioning Derrida.
210 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
Moving together to change things is, however, itself a complex, contradictory, medi-
ated, and mobile process. At the course, most—if at no single point all—of us were
gathered and present in a room, focusing on matters of self-representation and self-
exposure in research, matters which were present in the form of verbal utterances,
power point slides, videos, texts (and even in one case as tattoo and tight muscles).
The distribution of positions—central or peripheral, or simply talking or listening,
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 211
Again, the point is not to boast of our “good questions,” but to highlight the ways
that our generalizations established and reflected connections to a collaborative
work on questions that we have in common—a work that stretches far back in time
and have wide implications, but which also constituted our interactions at the course,
reconfigured our positions, and, in turn, transformed those questions and references.
We are not sure how these questions have evolved in Emily’s work since then, but
one good place to look is probably her forthcoming book.
A little further down, she goes on:
As I continue to work on my next book, somehow the course gave me a new procedure,
which is actually a very old-fashioned one. I now have a large cork bulletin board and stick
pins. I am going to think of what I write as ‘snippets’ without worrying about how they fit
together. Then I will print them out on different colors of paper and cut them up and pin
them on the board—just like the cops on TV crime shows do it. Somehow, this feels very
liberating—non-linear production of text where the connections emerge when presented in
another medium. […] [The] course made me appreciate the value of combining different
media and the power of seeing your thoughts materialized in something tangible.
What “somehow” inspired Emily’s way of working on her book was probably not
just our reshuffling of the constellations of artifacts and activities of teaching, but
212 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
also our discussions of aesthetics, affectivity, and identity in the projects of Ida B
Lundgaard and Tiyasha Sengupta. Again, our argument is not that Emily was helped
discovering “the great new method” of writing with stick-pins, boards, and colors.
But if we zoom out, we can locate these discussions as part of a broader movement
to which Emily had already contributed, of acknowledging the various materializa-
tions of thought in something tangible (e.g., Martin 2014) as mattering, and as
powerful.
Prompted by Ida Lundgaard and others, we would emphasize that, in the process
of generalization, tangible materials matter beyond embodying a pre-formed
thought. When standards are materialized as models, rather than as thought, they are
challenged, constrained, and expanded by the material and sensuous qualities and
requirements of the model itself.
Ida writes in her “Letter to Us”:
I am thinking of how I write, and that I find it difficult to make a linear structure. That I
prefer to think of my writing as a lump of clay I form with my hands. That I start throwing
a casual raw lump at the table and then I start to model and shape; that this is the way I
prefer to work on shaping new thoughts.
Her metaphor at once performs and addresses the way that even text, as material
artifact, carries this aesthetic quality of speaking to us sensuously, more than what
we thought we had written. Using Rancière’s concept of the “aesthetic regime”
(2013), we can thus appreciate how prototyping is a work on “distributions of the
sensible,” of shaping neutral ground as “dissensus” between clashing regimes of
sense, and thus forming “boundary community” (Mørck 2010), through the rela-
tional aesthetics of artworks that work as “invitations to live in a shared world”
(Bourriaud et al. 2002).
Recognizing Ourselves
Are the power differentials in academia present when, in the previous section, we
make sure to quote the most famous participants as reporting how they, too, learnt
from this? Of course they are. We can’t dream away power differences and struc-
tures; but we can work on them. Part of how we do this is through constructing
ourselves collectively and individually. Above, you can directly see these power
flows in play since this text is itself among the artifacts that mediate and co-
construct them.
Our main point is democratic in the Rancièrian sense (1999) that we are trying to
rearticulate teaching in a way that recognizes students as equals in the premises and
processes, and not just the end results, of the practice. Those who were before
counted in as learners to be monitored and assessed, but counted out as co-producers
and assessors of knowledge, are now re-articulated as the “true people,” the agent-
subjects of “moving together to change things.” Nous sommes tou(te)s étudiant(e)
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 213
s12: we all identify as “students” (or, with Lave 2011, as “apprentices”). As such, we
are all emancipators of this more general and more promising collective practice of
prototyping.
This text is itself written as a bid for such recognition. If it is not just another
fetishized bit of knowledge, neither is it simply an expression of an emancipation
already accomplished. It is an argument, a move in a negotiation, a political inter-
vention: “Politics is the art of warped deductions and mixed identities. It is the art
of the local and singular construction of cases of universality” (Rancière 1999: 139).
What we want to accomplish through your reading is thus a Verallgemeinerung,
generalizing in the above-mentioned, at once epistemological and ethical sense.
That is a precarious struggle, since we are doing this within the academic institu-
tions, which are still—and, with New Public Management, even increasingly—
largely structured in the ideology of reproducing sanctioned knowledge.
In her “Letter to Us”, Mille Keis described how this distributed sense of knowl-
edge and shared authority resonated
…with a more general concern about the importance of care and mattering, which has
grown out of various encounters, where I have sensed or felt the effects of the presence/
absence of care and mattering. Some of these experiences have been vicarious, e.g. through
reading the works of Annemarie Mol, Carol Gilligan and Sara Ahmed, whose works all
contain a contagious curiosity about people, practices and power relations. At the same
time, their works contain a sensitivity to what might “dull” this curiosity, to what might
make it more difficult to see, listen and learn from ourselves and each other, and how we
might resist this process of “dulling”, both in our research processes and in life. An example
of this is the Listening guide developed by Carol Gilligan, which “…tunes our ear to the
multiplicity of voices that speak within and around us, including voices that speak at the
margins and those which in the absence of resonance or response, tend to be held in
silence” (Gilligan 2011).
Quoting Mille Keis quoting Gilligan is a way of recognizing her as academic par-
ticipant. Our writing of letters—on Mille’ suggestion and under her instructions—
was a deliberate form of self-presentation. Like in auto-ethnography (Ellis 2004)
and feminist standpoint theory (Harding 2003), presenting (and thus “objectifying”)
the individual self, even with its flaws and dullnesses, does not generalize by diag-
nosing pathology, but by struggling for a more inclusive recognition of human lives.
The individual case is then an expansion of the prototype, rather than idiosyncrasies
to be weeded out.
Thus, our own (the authors’) Letters to Us were both concerned with our bad
conscience about not being quite able to appreciate the richness of the course we
were supposed to run. Morten complained of “not knowing people well enough”
and even: “I always scratch surfaces”; Line wrote of her “feeling of stress [that] was
mainly connected to the chronic feeling of being behind in [her] academic research
life.” But our main narratives were both of excitement and relief. The superficial
generalizing transfer, which always threatens to substitute for a proper process of
12
That is “We are all students.” Nowadays people know this move from the “Je suis Charlie” and
later “Me Too” movements. Rancière (1999) discusses the call “We are all German Jews” in the
student movement of May 1968 in France.
214 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
This takes us to the conclusion of our argument. Echoing and referencing Ana’s let-
ter, Mille writes of sensing or feeling the effects of the presence/absence of care and
mattering. Listening to marginal voices within and around us is a struggle for rec-
ognition in which self-presentation forms a part; but this is also a rearticulation and
a performance of care that can be felt.
In our reading, care is the core concern of the “reflecting team” we have tried to
learn from, much more than the technicalities of conversation formats. In general,
we suggest this as an important ethical aspect of how to read and rearticulate meth-
ods of social work.
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 215
The concept of care itself is complex and rich. The idea that we all basically
strive and struggle for agency through participation in praxis (Handlungsfähigkeit)
derived ultimately from the Spinozan legacy in the Marxist tradition taken up in
GSCP. This implied a notion of praxis as “Vor-Sorge,” a proactive care for our con-
ditions of life. It is quite possible that the phenomenological influence (on the late
Holzkamp and thus many of his followers) has tended later to push GSCP ethics in
the direction of an emphasis on individual autonomy, and that this is connected with
thinking of generalization more narrowly as communicative representations of the
“first person perspectives” of individual subjects. Our emphasis rather on general-
ization as prototypes is connected with an emphasis on care and ethics as collec-
tively and politically, contentiously constructed (cf. also Mørck in press, Nissen
2009b). Mørck (in press) argues for a social practice ethics, where we as researchers
reflect the implications of research practice for the involved and reflect how it makes
a difference in the world, especially in relation to processes of humanization of
people from the margins. Recent scholars such as Mol (2008), Stengers (2010),
Raffnsøe (2017), and Stiegler (2010) are also useful references here, not least when
we include the ecological dimensions of the relations of mutual presupposition
between praxis and life more broadly.
In the school, care (for “well-being,” moral education, etc.) has always been
present as concern, even if increasingly external to the core practice of teaching.
The more knowledge is decontextualized, the less it appears integrated in cultures
and ways of living. A certain style of writing, posture, etc. is no longer as integral to
performing the habitus of an educated class as when Bourdieu wrote his famous
“Distinction” (1984). This development has formed part of a precarious democrati-
zation of education, but it has also marginalized and psychologized care, separated
it from learning. Rearticulating teaching as dialogical is reconnecting it to praxis
and to lives, thereby generalizing its scope beyond the growing gap between tech-
nology and existence.
The institutionalized ethics of research, which we know from university ethical
boards, also suffer from the same externality. The various formalized procedures in
which the rights of its various stakeholders (authors, sponsors, subjects, users) are
inscribed have little to do with the content of research and its generalizations, as if
that were itself without implications. A more substantial kind of research ethics
evolves from aligning with social movements that challenge and co-create knowl-
edge itself by involving (recruiting, recognizing, interpellating, and caring for) mar-
ginalized voices (Thorgaard 2010). We tried to perform this at the course by
involving our multi-positioned co-researchers in the sessions that dealt with our
own research projects, in order to display, enact, and problematize them as joint
ventures.
The view of situated generalization that we propose implies that to generalize is
to assume and perform ethical standpoints. Each time a prototype suggests its
expanded relevance, on the horizon of praxis, new marginal voices are heard, new
communities imagined, and participants from the margins are invited to change
position. By the same token, ethics is situated, meaning it must be reconstructed
each time. The dialectics we take up as an epistemology of practice only arrives at
216 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
References
Andersen, T. (1991). The reflecting team: Dialogues and dialogues about the dialogues. New York:
W.W. Norton.
Bakhtin, M. M. (1988). The dialogic imagination: Four essays. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Balibar, É. (2016). Citizen subject: Foundations for philosophical anthropology. London: Oxford
University Press.
Bernstein, R. J. (1971). Praxis and action: Contemporary philosophies of human activity.
Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Bloch, E. (1995). The principle of hope. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Bourdieu, P. (1984). Distinction: A social critique of the judgement of taste. Cambridge: Harvard
University Press.
Bourriaud, N., Pleasance, S., Woods, F., & Copeland, M. (2002). Relational aesthetics. Dijon: Les
presses du reel.
Apart from Jensen, Stengers, and Gilligan, these ideas can be further unfolded with the philoso-
13
phies of technology and care of Bernard Stiegler (2013) and Annemarie Mol (2008).
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 217
Christie, N. (1971). Hvis skolen ikke fantes. [If there were no such thing as school]. Oslo:
Universitetsforlaget.
Davies, B. (1990). Agency as a form of discursive practice: A classroom scene observed. British
Journal of Sociology of Education, 11(3), 341–361.
Davies, B. and S. Gannon (2006). Doing collective biography: Investigating the production of
subjectivity, Berkshire, UK: McGraw-Hill Education
Dawydow, V. V. (1973). Arten der Verallgemeinerung im Unterricht. Berlin: Volk & Wissen.
Dreier, O. (2008). Psychotherapy in everyday life. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Ellis, C. (2004). The ethnographic I: A methodological novel about autoethnography. Walnut
Creek: Rowman Altamira.
Freire, P. (1996). Pedagogy of the oppressed. London: Penguin Books.
Gilligan, C. (2011). Joining the resistance: Psychology, politics, girls and women. Cambridge:
Polity Press Harvard Graduate School of Education.
Harding, S. G. (2003). The feminist standpoint theory reader: Intellectual and political controver-
sies. London: Routledge.
Haug, W. F. (1979). Umrisse zu einer Theorie des Ideologischen. In Projekt Ideologie Theorie
(Ed.), Theorien über Ideologie (pp. 178–205). Hamburg: Argument.
Haug, F. (1999). Female sexualisation: A collective work of memory. London: Verso.
Haug, F. (2003). Lernverhältnisse. Selbstbewegungen und Selbstblockierungen. Hamburg:
Argument.
Haug, F. (2004). Patientin im neoliberalen Krankenhaus. In S. Graumann & K. Grüber (Eds.),
Patient–Bürger–Kunde. Soziale und ethische Aspekte des Gesundheitswesens (pp. 9–48).
Münster: LIT Verlag.
Haug, F. (2012). Memory-work as a method of social science research: A detailed rendering of
memory-work method. Retrieved from http://www.friggahaug.inkrit.de/documents/memory-
work-researchguidei7.pdf
Højrup, T. (2003). State, culture and life-modes. The foundations of life-mode analysis. Aldershot:
Ashgate.
Holzkamp, K. (1973). Sinnliche Erkenntnis: Historischer Ursprung und gesellschaftliche Funktion
der Wahrnehmung. Frankfurt/M: Athenäum.
Holzkamp, K. (1983a). Grundlegung der Psychologie. Frankfurt/M: Campus-Verlag.
Holzkamp, K. (1983b). We don’t need no education. Forum Kritische Psychologie, 11, 113–125.
Ilyenkov, E. V. (1977). Dialectical logic. Essays on its history and theory. Moscow: Progress
Publishers.
Ilyenkov, E. V. (1982). The dialectics of the abstract and the concrete in Marx’s Capital. Moscow:
Progress Publishers.
Jameson, F. (2009). Valences of the dialectic. London: Verso.
Jensen, U. J. (1987). Practice and progress: A theory for the modern health care system. Oxford:
Blackwell.
Jensen, U. J. (1999). Categories in activity theory: Marx’ philosophy just-in-time. In S. Chaiklin,
M. Hedegaard, & U. J. Jensen (Eds.), Activity theory and social practice: Cultural-historical
approaches (pp. 79–99). Aarhus: Aarhus University Press.
Kuzmanic, M. (2008). Collective memory and social identity: A social psychological exploration
of the memories of the disintegration of former Yugoslavia. Psiholoska Obzorja/Horizons of
Psychology, 17(2), 5–26.
Langemeier, I., & Nissen, M. (2004). Research methods: Cultural-historical activity theory. In
B. Somekh & C. Lewin (Eds.), Research methods in the social sciences. London: Sage.
Latour, B. (1987). Science in action. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Lave, J. (2011). Apprenticeship in critical ethnographic practice. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
Liberali, F. C. (2009). Researchers learning by intervention research: The “Acting-as-Citizens”
program as a joint production between researchers and deprived communities in São Paulo.
In Culture and emerging educational challenges: A dialogue with Brazil/Latin America .
International Cultural-Historical Human Sciences, 30, 75–93.
218 M. Nissen and L. L. Mørck
Martin, E. (2007). Bipolar expeditions: Mania and depression in American culture. Princeton:
Princeton University Press.
Martin, E. (2014). Table. Somatosphere. Retrieved from http://somatosphere.net/2014/03/table.
html
Marx, K. (2018 [1845]). Theses on Feuerbach. Retrieved from http://www.marxists.org/archive/
marx/works/1845/theses/theses.htm
Mol, A. (2008). The logic of care. Health and the problem of patient choice. New York: Routledge.
Mørck, L. L. (2006). Grænsefællesskaber: Læring og overskridelse af marginalisering [Boundary
communities. Learning and transcending marginalization]. Frederiksberg: Roskilde
Universitets Forlag.
Mørck, L. L. (2010). Expansive learning as production of community. NSSE Yearbook, 109(1),
1–21.
Mørck, L. L. (in press). New standards for social practice ethics? Researching gang exit with for-
mer gang members. In Critical criminology.
Mørck, L. L., & Celosse-Andersen, C. M. (in press). Mo(ve)ment methodology—Identity forma-
tion moving beyond gang involvement. Annual Review of Critical Psychology.
Mørck, L. L., & Nissen, M. (2005). Praksisforskning: Deltagende kritik mellem mikrofonhold-
eri og akademisk bedreviden [Practice research: Participatory critique between holding the
microphone and playing the academic know-it-all]. I: T. B. Jensen & G. Christensen, (red.),
Psykologiske og pædagogiske metoder: Kvalitative og kvantitative forskningsmetoder i praksis
(s. 123–154). Frederiksberg: Roskilde Universitets Forlag.
Nissen, M. (2004). Wild objectification: Social work as object. Outlines, 6(1), 73–89.
Nissen, M. (2009a). Objectification and prototype. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 6(1),
67–87.
Nissen, M. (2009b). Prototypes for the ethics of a democratic social engineering. In T. Teo,
P. Stenner, A. Rutherford, E. Park, & C. Baerveldt (Eds.), Varieties of theoretical psychology.
International philosophical and practical concerns (pp. 146–154). Concord: Captus Press.
Nissen, M. (2012). The Subjectivity of Participation: Articulating Social Work with Youth in
Copenhagen. London: Palgrave/Macmillan
Nissen, M. (2015). Meeting youth in movement and on neutral ground. Dialogic Pedagogy: An
International Online Journal, 3. https://doi.org/10.5195/dpj.2015.34.
Nissen, M. (2016). Standards and standpoints. Why standards, and studying them, imply critique.
Theory & Psychology, 26(2), 163.
Raffnsøe, S. (2017). What is critique? Critical turns in the age of criticism. Outlines. Critical
Practice Studies, 18(1), 28–60. Retrieved from https://tidsskrift.dk/outlines/article/view/26261.
Ranciere, J. (1991). The ignorant schoolmaster. Five lessons in intellectual emancipation. Stanford:
Stanford University Press.
Rancière, J. (1999). Disagreement: Politics and philosophy. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota
Press.
Rancière, J. (2013). Aisthesis: Scenes from the aesthetic regime of art. London: Verso.
Schraube, E., & Osterkamp, U. (2013). Psychology from the standpoint of the subject: Selected
writings of Klaus Holzkamp. London: Palgrave Macmillan.
Smith, D. E. (2005). Institutional ethnography. A sociology for people. New York: Altamira Press.
Stengers, I. (2010). Cosmopolitics I. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Stenner, P. (2018). Liminality and experience. A transdisciplinary approach to the psychosocial.
London: Palgrave Macmillan.
Stetsenko, A. (2017). The transformative mind: Expanding Vygotsky’s approach to development
and education. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Stiegler, B. (2010). Taking care of youth and the generations. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Stiegler, B. (2013). What makes life worth living: On pharmacology. London: Wiley.
Stiegler, B. (2015). States of shock: Stupidity and knowledge in the 21st century. London: Wiley.
11 Situated Generalization with Prototypes in Dialogical Teaching 219
Peter Busch-Jensen and Ernst Schraube
zooming out to zoom in. Before we elaborate on these strategies, we take a critical
look at different forms of scientific generalization and describe in more detail
common features of psychological processes and the specific challenges of situated
generalization within psychological research.
Because we live our everyday life together with others in a shared world, general-
ization and the internal relationship between the subjective and objective, the par-
ticular and general, are inherent aspects of everyday life: talking, thinking, acting,
living. Cooking for a group of friends, for example, involves a generalized way of
thinking about our friends. Such as, how many will come? What might they enjoy
eating? Is there something we should talk about? However, not only the everyday
activities and social relations are entangled in processes of generalization, also the
material objects and technologies in our everyday life are a result of processes of
generalization and embody generalizations. A bicycle, for example, embodies quite
detailed generalized knowledge about the human body and its specific characteris-
tics including general notions about the cyclist as a person and the environment she/
he will bicycle in.
In the practice of everyday living, we do not notice our generalization activities
much. In a way, they are secondary, they only matter if they do not work. If we cook
fish for our friends, for example, and one of our friends does not like fish, we are
confronted with our neglect, the fact that we have not thought carefully enough
about the general food preferences of our friends. The dilemma may be resolved
quite easily by apologizing and, if possible, by changing the practice and trying to
expand the general so that it integrates the particular. The crucial issue of everyday
generalizations is that they work. Whether they build on correct and sound
knowledge might be relevant, but it is secondary. Within scientific generalizations,
it is the other way around. Its central aim is to move from opinions, preconceptions,
and prior knowledge to correct, sound, and socially relevant knowledge. The societal
trust in science builds on the premise that scientific research is taking care of
developing not one-sided, knowledge driven by particular interests, but accurate,
reliable, and general knowledge for the common good.
To achieve this purpose, major forms of scientific generalization build on quan-
titative approaches of generalization in frequencies and the questions of how often
an instance occurs in a given context. Such an approach seems to make perfect sense
because numbers promise accuracy and secure knowledge. The methodological
strategies of frequency generalization build on measuring the phenomena in their
relations and on the idea that generalization is not possible from a single case. This
latter principle refers to the problem of induction and the notion that it is logically
untenable to conclude from a single case to many or all cases (or from unknown to
224 P. Busch-Jensen and E. Schraube
known, or from particular to general propositions). If, for example, one student in
an educational program suffers from stress, we cannot conclude from the single
student that many or all students in the program suffer from stress as well. Therefore,
the research design is usually based on representative samples which aim to
adequately reflect the population as a whole so that the findings of the sample can
be “generalized” to the population. Within the vision of generalizing in frequencies,
this form of concluding from a representative sample to a more general population,
category, or class is understood as generalization. Major traditions of psychological
research build on frequency generalization as the basis of evidence and the central
practice of developing knowledge and apply it in various forms especially in
classical experimental settings as well as surveys with questionnaires.
The exploration of frequencies can definitely help develop relevant and soci-
etally important knowledge (for instance, about the frequency of stress in a certain
population). However, as a general epistemic approach in psychological research, it
would be too narrow and one-sided. Usually, the results require further and more
in-depth psychological investigation to explore the phenomenon in its relevant
contexts (e.g., why and how persons of a certain population develop stress). An issue
which refers to a fundamental problem of generalization in frequencies: the
methodological strategies do not really fit the nature of psychological phenomena.
Psychological processes are only in a very limited way accessible via numbers. In
fact, epistemic strategies of measuring can reduce and even distort psychological
phenomena beyond recognition and the possibility of grasping human subjectivity,
experience, and action dissolves in thin air.
Since the 1960s, the problem of a too narrow, particular, and fixed conception of
generalization and ways of developing scientific knowledge has been widely
discussed in psychology, including the need for a fundamental epistemic renewal of
psychological research practice (Chimirri and Schraube 2019; Gergen 2015;
Holzkamp 2013b, c; Teo 2009; Valsiner 2019). In response, an epistemological shift
from a god’s eye view toward situated knowledge has crystallized in psychological
theory of science and the understanding of the practice of developing scientific
knowledge. A major line of modern science builds on the assumption that the
researcher, as Svend Brinkmann explains, “is an isolated knower, who stands
outside the world and aims to represent it correctly. True knowledge, on this account,
means correct representation” (2012: 32). Such a representational notion of the
production of knowledge from an external, abstract, and universalist perspective,
disconnected from specific historical and societal relations, is challenged today.
Scholars realize that their research activities and practices of developing knowledge
do not occur in a social vacuum, but are rooted in the world, a world involving other
human beings as well as societal relations, culture, technology, politics, and nature.
They realize that, through their research and production of knowledge, they not only
participate in the creation of the social world, but also view the social world in turn
as affecting their research practices, including their theories, concepts, methodologies
as well as their own thoughts, ideas, and conduct of everyday life (O’Doherty et al.
2019; Schraube 2015; Schraube and Højholt 2019, Chap. 1 in this volume). In the
words of Brinkmann:
12 Zooming In Zooming Out: Analytical Strategies of Situated Generalization… 225
Knowing is not something that simply happens – as if we were able to magically represent
the world ‘as it is’ – but rather . . . an activity. Knowing is something people do, as part of
their lives. . . . We need to desacralize knowledge and admit that if knowing is a human
activity, it is always already situated somewhere – in some cultural, historical and social
situation. (2012: 32)
Science studies substantiate this epistemological shift and argue for an understand-
ing of scientific research and the production of knowledge as an inherently worldly
situated, embodied, and socially and culturally constructed process (Knorr Cetina
1999; Latour and Woolgar 1986; Hess 1997). As historian of science Donna
Haraway explains: The “view from above,” the isolated, disconnected, and infinitive
vision is no longer convincing: “Only partial perspective promises objective vision”
(1991: 190). With the term situated generalization, we refer to such an embodied
conception of scientific research practice which roots itself in its internal relations
to the world and in the particular socio-historical contexts, everyday practices and
subjectivities in which the production of knowledge actually unfolds.
If we assume generalization not as a fixed procedure, but as a situated process
dependent on the particular problem, content and subject matter of research, the
question concerning the particular psychological subject matter emerges. Even if
psychology as a science still does not agree on a shared vocabulary of what
psychology is actually about, there are, as mentioned above, well-founded arguments
for a few basic general characteristics of psychological phenomena: they are given
subjectively, exist in context and are in constant change. Since these assumptions
about the general texture of psychological processes are crucial for elaborating
analytical strategies of generalization, we will now take a closer look at them.
psychology (e.g., John Dewey, William Stern, Wilhelm Wundt). During the twentieth
century, psychologists increasingly realized that persons as active subjects are not
just experiencing subjects, living in a world, but also acting subjects, making their
own world on the basis of their experience and action, who in turn are re-making
themselves. They realized that human subjects live in a society created by humans
and, based on systematic analyses, they described how psychological processes
unfold in everyday context and how the investigation of the various layers of the
internal relationship between subjectivity and society is crucial for developing
psychological knowledge and for understanding human experience and action,
including its implications (e.g., Gergen 2009; Harré 1979; Holzkamp 1983, 2013a;
Leontyev 1981; Vygotzky 1978). Generalization in this perspective involves both a
reflection on how we as active human subjects participate in creating the world as
well as a reflection on what this world means for us, for our subjectivity and agency.
Furthermore, they realized that human subjects are situated not only in space but
also in time. They are societal, but also historical beings. As living beings, human
subjects and psychological phenomena are in constant change. “I” am never the
same. For instance, “my” experience of something in this moment is different from
“my” experience 5 min ago. As Valsiner emphasizes:
Psychological phenomena are transient. A thought crosses my mind (and vanishes), I feel
happy at the sight of a beautiful scene, and so on. Here is the problem – which is also the
solution – the psyche is profoundly constructive. It cannot simply repeat what has been expe-
rienced before – it necessarily adds a new nuance of the novel moment. Consequently, it
created many different forms of thinking and feeling, all of which may disappear. (2014: 8)
principles that transcend the uniqueness of any of these moments . . . Generality is in singu-
larity. (2015: 233)
Psychological processes are subjective, particular, and unique, but at the same time
recognizable. Through my personal experience, I am connected with other people in
real terms because experiences relate in their general dimensions to the objective
world and its fabric of possibilities, limits, and problems for our actions (Dreier
2007). In such an intersubjective context of experience, subjective experience
becomes objectifiable and generalizable as individual ways of participating, dealing
with and realizing societal possibilities and limits of experience and action.
However, since we are not able to see immediately how subjective everyday
experiences relate to general societal possibilities and limits of action, the task of
psychology as a science is precisely to analyze this internal relationship and to
carefully trace the phenomena in their connections.
Taking point of departure in specific problems, questions, and dilemmas in
everyday experience, situated generalization is a world-oriented way of reflection.
It is an ongoing process of shedding light on human experience and actions (and
their implications) in their connections as a way of analyzing, working with, and
bringing movement into the problems and practices. It is a process not just oriented
to persons but to the world, and what the world in its relevant aspects means for
human experience, action, and conduct of everyday life.
We are now prepared to return to our question of how to achieve generalization,
objectivity, and sound knowledge without reducing the uniqueness, individuality,
and subjective givenness of psychological phenomena. Situated psychological
generalization attains scientific objectivity not by disarticulating the subjective
dimension of human life, but rather through the generalization of the subjective.
Adkins 2016: 353). The point is that to identify the general in the particular, likeness
in the otherness, we must synthesize and connect events and actions, not isolate,
separate, and disconnect them. And to do so, we need to look with people and
around them, rather than on people and inside them.
The ability to see the world from other people’s perspectives, experiences, and
actions is crucial. Not only because it tends to turn judgment of persons’ actions into
something less straightforward and thus challenges our propensity to pass easy
judgment and suggest oversimplified solutions to complex problems. But more
importantly, because the ability to relate people’s actions to lived circumstances,
concrete contexts, and recognizable concerns helps us see the situated intelligibility
of human experience and action. Understanding this situated intelligibility enhances
our ability to identify the socio-cultural genesis of problems and the diverse forms
of meaningfulness afforded by our shared reality. It is therefore a key to better
political and scientific solutions, interventions, forms of collaboration, and peaceful
coexistence.
With the concept of the banality of evil, Hannah Arendt describes how our ability
to experience otherness as likeness embodies invaluable qualities for life in common.
When reporting and contemplating the war crime trial against Adolf Eichmann,
Arendt concluded that Eichmann was not an amoral monster. Instead, he seemed to
perform evil deeds without evil intentions, simply because of his “thoughtlessness.”
A thoughtlessness connected precisely to an inability to see the world from other
people’s perspective and its resulting disengagement from the reality of his own
acts. Eichmann “never realized what he was doing,” Arendt wrote, due to an
“inability . . . to think from the standpoint of somebody else” (1963: 56).
Following this argument, one can wonder that it is usually not psychology or
scientific inquiry that challenges us to put ourselves in someone else’s place: to see,
feel, and think about the lived reality of psychological phenomena. Psychological
traditions that focus on individual mental faculties simply have very little to say
about what it is like to be a human being living with specific dilemmas, relationships,
necessities, challenges, and pleasures. Therefore, most of us have learned more
about other cultures, life situations, and the meaning of specific life circumstances
(e.g., what it means to have another age, gender, ethnicity, job, belief, economy,
upbringing, body) from movies and literature, than we have from scientific
psychology. We need to recognize the depth of this illogicality, its vast social
implications and the importance of correcting it (Busch-Jensen 2015b).
The art of mimesis demonstrates that to understand likeness in the otherness, it
is important to contextualize people’s actual sayings, doings, and relations in their
worldly lived reality since doing so enables us to relate human subjectivity in even
its most particular forms to more general dimensions of recognizably human
concerns. These concerns provide reasons for actions and hence make up the
12 Zooming In Zooming Out: Analytical Strategies of Situated Generalization… 231
To study human subjectivity in its lived reality, the movement of zooming out to
zoom in includes, as mentioned above, a phenographic dimension of the analysis
and a detailed description of the phenomena under investigation. On the basis of a
person’s articulations of their particular standpoints and perspectives, phenography
engages in describing as precisely and completely as possible the particular subject
matter the research project is dealing with. It articulates the composition and
relevant dimensions of the issues at stake in a way so that anybody intensively
concerned with the topic will approve them as appropriate. Since one cannot
immediately see how the subjective, everyday experiences relate to general societal
possibilities and limits of action, dialogue and conversation represents an essential
medium of phenography and route to knowledge in psychological research. With
the words of Steinar Kvale and Svend Brinkmann: “If you want to know how people
understand their world and their lives, why not talk with them?” (2009: xvii).
Talking with people and listening to what they are saying are crucial preconditions
of phenographic formulations. Phenography helps us to develop a common ground
for reflection and provides the material and substance for the further analysis. It
creates the basis for situated generalization by gathering and accumulating pre-
understandings and already familiar knowledge and by explicating relevant
constituents, connections, and contradictions of the phenomenon. With the concept
of phenography, we draw on the work of Klaus Holzkamp. He explains:
Phenography is . . . first and foremost concerned with clarifying and accentuating the rele-
vant dimensions of the subject matter for the purpose of improving intersubjective under-
standing of what we are talking about . . . The phenographic approach is to be distinguished
from the phenomenological approach as a philosophical method. While in “phenomenol-
ogy” – as inaugurated by Husserl and Scheler – philosophical statements . . . are accom-
plished by bracketing the natural worldview and by abstracting gradually and reductively
from everyday contexts, phenography refers to the unreduced reality of human life and
follows no wider objectives than just its descriptive clarification. (1978: 21f, translation by
the authors)
232 P. Busch-Jensen and E. Schraube
[Phenography] determines to what extent the material will be meagre and trivial or
comprises the wealth of experience and knowledge characterizing the conduct of everyday
life in its manifold relations to the world. Thus, “phenography” is a determining factor in
subject science self-understanding, and the extensive exchange of experiences within the
team of researchers and co-researchers is an indispensable basis for any productive subject
science research. (2013c: 340, translation by the authors)
Understanding and Hanging-Togetherness
either of these isolated facts and the actions under scrutiny. Rather, it is the journey
into how these and other particular circumstances hang together in a particular way;
how they make up a particular life situation that makes Walter Whites’ actions
generally recognizable as intelligible and human. To understand human subjectivity,
experience and action therefore requires developing knowledge of the hanging-
togetherness of psychological phenomena (Dreier 2019; Schatzki 2002). What this
means is that psychological generalization is not simply about identifying or
categorizing phenomena as for instance gendered, ethnic, or in other ways structural
by constitution. It is not simply about measuring or listing informational components,
even of highly sophisticated theoretical nature. It is about situating actions in their
complex lived reality.
To make psychological questions, problems, and concerns understandable, we
continuously have to relate to human subjectivity by disclosing the meanings
ascribed by participants to the practice under scrutiny. We have to examine the
relevant details of the practices associated with the problems and qualify our
understanding of what these details and practices are, the dynamics of them and the
actions they are comprised of. And we need to examine the unknown terrains within
the details of social practices and people’s everyday life.
Depending on what problem we are studying, we might focus on tacit knowl-
edge, passions, and practical concerns that guide and affect peoples’ participation in
the practices under scrutiny; or the mastery, knowledge, creativity, reason-dis-
courses, coordination, and engagement afforded by the practice. What matter is that
we try to grasp the aspects of the phenomena that are hidden, unknown, silenced,
black-boxed, or just difficult to appreciate when seen from an immediate perspec-
tive (Busch-Jensen 2015a).
All activities and practices are involved in relationships and associations that extend
in both space and time and form a texture of social relations, dependencies, and
references. Our social world constitutes a terrain of multiple connections, concerns,
and perspectives, which again relate to wider societal configurations, for example,
divisions of labor, knowledge hierarchies, and distributions of resources. The study
of subjectivity in situated practices is also a study of more structural dimensions of
social life. Therefore, the question arises how to critically examine the more
structural aspects of the problem under investigation. We suggest multi-perspectival
practice research as a constructive epistemic frame for the situated study of structure
in the sense of explorative movements between perspectives and practices in a
horizon-widening fashion.
Tracing the connections between people and practices allows us to see the con-
nections between the here-and-now of the situated practicing and the elsewhere-
and-then of other practices. We need to uncover and examine this hanging-
togetherness in and between people and social practices to understand better how
the trans-contextual elements, relevant for our study, come into being, gain meaning,
are kept in place and/or are being transformed. In doings so, we are in fact engaged
in unveiling not only the conditions of the local accomplishment of practice, but
also the ways in which it connects to broader social landscapes, or more precisely:
practice-scapes.
Tracing the connections in practice-scapes is a form of zooming. However, it
does not imply putting the practice under the microscope. Rather, it relates to a
careful work of tracing how a given practice in numerous ways relate to other
practice as well. This work invites a form of mobile multi-perspectival practice
research that involves efforts of sequential re-positioning and ongoing dialogue
with empirical observations and theory, which help us carefully unveil relevant
dimensions and central constituents of the practice-scape the problem under
investigation is weaved into.
Just as any action in one way or another constitutes the resource for the accomplish-
ment of other actions, one practice constitutes the resource for the accomplishment
of other practices, forming complex nexuses of practices in space and time. These
nexuses stretch out more or less visible webs of connections, with both spatial and
temporal fabric, between people, contexts, and activities. Accordingly, human sub-
jectivity, experience, and action are rooted in complex fields of nexuses of practice,
both established by it and establishing it. This is why zooming in on a practice
simultaneously constitute movements of zooming out, demonstrating for example
how a “local,” “particular,” or “individual” problem relate also to more structural
236 P. Busch-Jensen and E. Schraube
dimensions of how practices are connected to each other in more general arrange-
ments (Chaiklin and Lave 1993; Nicolini 2013; Schatzki et al. 2001).
When we talk of structural phenomena as for example the state, inequality, capi-
talism, climate change, or new public management, we are, in fact, referring to how
certain practices and forms of action and organization have gained a durability
through complex forms of inter-connectivity. Their inter-connectivity gives them an
“object-like” quality; since they become weaved into aspect of our lives, we have
gradually learned to take for granted and thus find it difficult to imagine to be
without. This particular quality, however, is precisely an implication of how
practices become resources in the accomplishment of other practices and vice versa.
It is this aspect of social coexistence we refer to, when we talk of “social problems.”
The tightness connections may acquire through dispersion can make practices
hard to change since changing one practice might require changing numerous
practices as well. Structural phenomena are therefore always dynamic and
ambiguous since redirecting, adding, or cutting connections always involve change:
new possibilities, challenges, and risks. Hence, no structural phenomenon transcends
fully the local and particular. It is made, transformed, and kept in place in a texture
of ongoing situated actions and everyday practices.
Methodological strategies for tracing connections between the particular and the
general can be found in various traditions of thought (e.g., Foucault 1997; Holzkamp
2013c; Højholt and Kousholt 2018; Latour 2005; Marcus 1995). In multi-perspectival
practice research, tracing connections refer to the fact that psychological phenomena
are processual and transient. The strategies of tracing are defined by the particular
problem the investigation is dealing with and can take heterogenous forms as well
as departures. The traced connections might be problem-based or task-related,
cultural, social, or political. They can be mediated by documents, feelings,
technologies, laws, politics, metaphors, job-tasks, commodities, etc. Furthermore,
they can be enabling or restrictive, more or less hierarchical or symmetrical.
Precisely because human subjectivity, experience, and action do not relate to
isolated parts but to how things relate to each other, the study of structure does not
have a bounded object of study nor a distinct perspective attached to it. We should
therefore refrain from thinking about the structural as a sort of overarching
framework or general law that give overall context to the study of a particular
psychological phenomenon. Rather, we should think about the structural as integral
to dynamic arrangements of situated practices.
Through empirical and theoretically movements of re-positioning, we see how
actions, practices, things, and understandings find different meaning and use in
various contexts and situations. Thus, the production of structural dimensions of
social life, emerge through a multiplication of manifestations. This is significant.
Firstly, because it invites us to imagine that similarity and connectedness to some
extent is demonstrated also in differences. Secondly, because it invites us to rethink
12 Zooming In Zooming Out: Analytical Strategies of Situated Generalization… 237
References
Højholt, C., & Kousholt, D. (2018). Children participating and developing agency in and across
various social practices. In M. Fleer & B. van Oers (Eds.), International handbook of early
childhood education (Vol. 2, pp. 1581–1597). Dordrecht: Springer.
Holzkamp, K. (1983). Grundlegung der Psychologie. Frankfurt/M: Campus.
Holzkamp, K. (2013a). What could a psychology from the standpoint of the subject be? In
E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint of the subject: Selected
writings of Klaus Holzkamp (A. Boreham & U. Osterkamp, Trans.) (pp. 46–59). Basingstoke:
Palgrave Macmillan.
Holzkamp, K. (2013b). Missing the point: Variable psychology’s blindness to the problem’s
inherent coherence? In E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint
of the subject: Selected writings of Klaus Holzkamp (A. Boreham & U. Osterkamp, Trans.)
(pp. 60–74). Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Holzkamp, K. (2013c). Psychology: Social self-understanding on the reasons for action in the con-
duct of everyday life. In E. Schraube & U. Osterkamp (Eds.), Psychology from the standpoint
of the subject: Selected writings of Klaus Holzkamp (A. Boreham & U. Osterkamp, Trans.)
(pp. 233–341). Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
Josselson, R. (2004). The hermeneutics of faith and the hermeneutics of suspicion. Narrative
Inquiry, 14(1), 1–28.
Knorr Cetina, K. (1999). Epistemic cultures: How the sciences make knowledge. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press.
Kvale, S., & Brinkmann, S. (2009). InterViews: Learning the craft of qualitative research inter-
viewing. London: Sage.
Latour, B. (2005). Reassembling the social. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Latour, B., & Woolgar, S. (1986). Laboratory life: The construction of scientific facts. Princeton:
Princeton University Press.
Lave, J., & Wenger, E. (1991). Situated learning: Legitimate peripheral participation. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Leontyev, A. N. (1981). Problems of the development of the mind. Moscow: Progress Publishers.
Marcus, G. E. (1995). Ethnography in/of the world system: The emergence of multi-sited ethnog-
raphy. Annual Review of Anthropology, 24, 95–117.
Nicolini, D. (2013). Practice theory, work and organization. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
O’Doherty, K., Osbeck, L., Schraube, E., & Yen, J. (Eds.). (2019). Psychological studies of science
and technology. Cham: Palgrave Macmillan.
Ricoeur, P. (1970). Freud and philosophy: An essay on interpretation. New Haven: Yale University
Press.
Schatzki, T. (1996). Social practices: A Wittgensteinian approach to human activity and the social.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Schatzki, T. (2002). The site of the social: A philosophical account of the constitution of social life
and change. Pennsylvania: Pennsylvania State University Press.
Schatzki, T., Knorr Cetina, K., & von Savigny, E. (2001). The practice turn in contemporary
theory. London: Routledge.
Schraube, E. (2013). First-person perspective and sociomaterial decentering: Studying technol-
ogy from the standpoint of the subject. Subjectivity, 6(1), 12–32. https://doi.org/10.1057/
sub.2012.28.
Schraube, E. (2015). Why theory matters: Analytical strategies of critical psychology.
Estudos de Psicologia (Special Issue on Critical Psychology), 32(3), 533–545. https://doi.
org/10.1590/0103-166X2015000300018.
Schraube, E., & Højholt, C. (2019). Subjectivity and knowledge: The formation of situated gen-
eralization in psychological research. In C. Højholt & E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity and
knowledge: Generalization in the psychological study of everyday life (pp. 1–19). New York:
Springer.
Slunecko, T. (2019). Tracking One’s Own Path – a Methodological Leitmotif of Cultural
Psychology. Integrative Psychological and Behavioral Science.
12 Zooming In Zooming Out: Analytical Strategies of Situated Generalization… 241
Teo, T. (2009). Philosophical concerns in critical psychology. In D. Fox, I. Prilleltensky, &
S. Austin (Eds.), Critical psychology: An introduction (pp. 36–53). London: Sage.
Teo, T. (2017). From psychological science to the psychological humanities: Building a general
theory of subjectivity. Review of General Psychology, 21(4), 281–291.
Valsiner, J. (2014). An invitation to cultural psychology. London: Sage.
Valsiner, J. (2015). Generalization is possible only from a single case (and from a single instance):
The value of a personal diary. In B. Wagoner, N. Chaudhary, & P. Hviid (Eds.), Integrating
experiences: Body and mind moving between contexts (pp. 233–243). Charlotte: Information
Age Publishing.
Valsiner, J. (2019). Generalization in science: Abstracting from unique events. In C. Højholt &
E. Schraube (Eds.), Subjectivity and knowledge: Generalization in the psychological study of
everyday life (pp. 79–98). New York: Springer.
Vygotzky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Zahavi, D. (2008). Subjectivity and selfhood: Investigating the first-person perspective. Cambridge:
MIT Press.
Index
A B
Abduction Baroque tradition, 146
irreversible time, 95 Biological organisms, 87
process of, 90 Brand schools, 31
Absolutization, 63
Abstracted variables, 178
Abstraction, 32–34, 56 C
abduction in irreversible time, 95 Caravaggio
AS-IF structures, 83 creative and reflective act, 154–156
distinctions made, 94 everyday life, 149–153
risk, 94 in Naples, 142–148
selection, 82 Cassirer’s model, 52
theory building, 89, 90 Childhood studies, 117, 118, 121
theory construction level, 94 Children’s generalization
Abstractive generalization, 83 characteristics, 115
Action research, 42, 45, 48, 51 declarative knowledge, 116
Activity theory, 67 defectological view, 116
Actor-network, 200 democratic knowledge, 116
Adult knowledge, 116 ethical-symmetrical co-research, 121–123
Agency, 42, 57 knowledge co-creation (see Knowledge
Analysis–synthesis process, 62 co-creation)
Analytical generalization, 6 political-educational emphasis, 116
Applied psychology, 51 procedural knowledge, 116
Argumentation, 141 researcher’s own positioning, 117
Aristotelian mode, 53 scientific concepts, 115
Art and psychology work, 141 scientific-everyday concepts (see
Artificial concepts, 65 Scientific-everyday concepts)
Artificial intelligence, 126 teleogenetic collaboration, 134–136
Artificial reconstruction, 150 Citizenship, 31
Astrophysics, 79 Clouds, 86, 87
Autocracy, 47 Collective memory work, 207
Auto-kinesis theory, 105, 106 Commensurability, 46
L O
Language, 1, 10 Objective connection, 65
Lenin’s Philosophical Notebook, 66 Ontological symmetry, 121
Life space, 46 Operationalism, 62
Limit of movement, 36
Live laypeople models, 142
Local contexts, 93 P
Longer school days, 30 Particularism, 74
Penal welfare, 160
Person–environment relationship, 104
M Phenography, 231, 232
Magical-realist projects, 130 Phenomenology, 51
Mainstream psychology Philosophical thinking, 71
generalization Photography, 151, 155
arbitrary variations, 179 Political-educational emphasis, 116
disease/anxiety, 179 Positive publicity, 30
elementarism and essentialism, Post-generalizing approaches, 5–6
179 Poverty
empirical concepts, 179 artefacts, 172
phenomena, 178 dynamics, 158
variables and phenomena, 178 focus on everyday, 157
variations, 178 homeless people, 170
Marx’s concept, 68 human-centred ways, 171
Meaning-carrier, 105 personal experiences, 162
Meaning-user, 105 personal inadequacies, 158
Measurement error, 85 personal laziness, 171
Methodological strategy, 119 philosophical position, 158
Methodology cycle, 89, 90 qualitative approaches, 171
Mimesis, 229 qualitative research, 171
Mimetic objects, 159 questions and images, 169
Multi-perspectival practice research, 235 social practices, 158
practice-scapes, 235 societal aetiology, 158
Mutual learning, 121–123 stress of, 160
substantive issue, 172
theoretical abstractions, 159
N visual exercise, 159
Nanopsychology, 80 visual/verbal texts, 172
Naples, 142–148 Practice research, 13–16
National Socialist German Workers’ Party Praxis, 51
(NSDAP), 48 abstraction, 32–34
Naturalistic approach, 154 as common causes (see Common causes)
Naturalistic style, 141 concept, 26
Neapolitan aristocracy, 142 contradictions, 29–32, 35–37
Negation, 83–85 experienced and systematic development, 24
Neoliberal socio-economic systems, 164 generalization, 25, 26
Newtonian physics, 61 historical social practice, 23
“No action without research, no research human activity, 27
without action” principle, 41 social activity, 27
Nomological generalization, 3 subjective aspects, 24
Nomothetic approach, 62 subjective matter, 36
Numerical generalization, 3–5 Preschool children, 130
248 Index
U
Units of analysis, 65, 71, 72 Z
Universalization, 125 Zone of potential estrangement (ZPE), 141,
Urban poverty, 160 142, 150–152, 154, 155